Logonomia_modernizzata

Document TypeModernised
Other editions:
  • semi-diplomatic
  • modernised
  • semi-diplomatic
  • modernised



        

   An    English Grammar by which the discourse of the people is more    easily improved, written by Alexander Gil, high master of Paul’s    School. Secon edition, a little more correct, but more suited to    the common use.

   

Printed    by John Beale at London.

   

1621.

   


   

     

   
   

         

   {n.    p.}        

   


   

   

Epistola    dedicatoria

   

To    the Most Serene and Powerful Sovereign James, by the grace of God,    King of Great Britan, France, and Ireland, defender of the faith,    etc.

   

If    I view my private duty, I recognize that I owe all the gratitude    of my heart to Your Majesty, by whose grace and kindness I have    been enabled to enter upon this way of life which I now follow; or    if I regard that common duty which all good men recognize is owed    to a most learned and excellent King, I have not dared to dedicate    to any individual among men, except to Your Grace,    {A2}    thi s work, however insignificant, which, among other things,    touches so closely upon the honor of our whole race – an honor    which you alone uphold and protect. For neither the art of war,    nor the knowledge of literature, nor the brilliance of genius, nor    the cultivation of manners, nor any skill in anything avails so    much for the glory of any nation as discourse, for through this    medium a people make all these things known among themselves; they    make them known to foreigners; they hand them down to posterity.    For this rea son renowned men – leaders, kings, and emperors –    have zealously fostered polish and elegance in their native    discourse . Julius Caesar wrote to Marcus Tullius concerning the    analogy of words. Augustus decreed that men should write and speak    in uniform manner. When Tiberius was about to address the senate,    he would not, unless he had asked pardon first, utter a single    foreign word. And Charles the Great -- great in his deeds of war,    greater in his virtues --capped his greatest service to literature    with this; namely, that he wrote, in emulation of the Greeks and    Romans, a grammar of his native tongue, attempting by rules and    precepts to render the Teutonic

   

language    more elegant and more polished and to strike out everything rude.    Chilperic, King of Soissons, added to the French alphabet four    characters which he had invented, and in a public edict ordered    that they be accepted, taught in the schools, {n.    p.}    and exhibited in writings. But let me turn from foreign examples    and view in sequence many of your ancestors . Edward the Third ,    the finest flower of the kings of his time, more illustrious in    martial deeds and more distinguished in wisdom than any other who    has lived, decreed that no one, either in examining cases at law    or in giving a judicial decision, should speak in French, a custom    introduced at the time of William the Norman, but that the    examinations of cases at law, judicial decisions, and other    public transactions should be rendered in the English language or    in the Latin. Oh, if the love of the people had kept pace with the    concern of so great a Prince! Surely    those skilled in the law would not then display even up to our own    time such mark s of slavishness branded on the name of the    English; nor would the English tongue be in bad repute among other    nations, as if it were rude and unpolished, for not one, I dare to    say it, not one of those tongues now in use among mortal men will    be found to be either more polished, or more elegant, or more    adapted to the expressing of every shade of thought, or mor e    fluent. Innumerable faults in writing have crept in, I admit, by    which the studies of our pupils are hindered, but calling to mind,    from ancient times on, the characters of our forefathers,    neglected through the indifference of former times, I have so    reestablished all of these that any one no matter how    uncultivated, {n.    p.}    once he has grasped the pronunciation of the letters, will be able    to comprehend at once at the first glance the true sound of our    words. But because all the success of this toil depends on your    pleasure alone (for error is neither perceived nor recognized when    it has long prevailed, nor is it immediately abandoned without the    setting of a strong example), so, whatever I am myself, whatever    my works and my efforts , all this I offer, most humbly    prostrating myself at the feet of Your Majesty, in order that Your    Majesty, in accordance with the excellent judgment of your divine    sensibility, may order my effort to be rendered valid, or even    unnecessary.

   

Your    Majesty' s most humble subject, Alexander Gil .

   

{n.    p.}

         

   
   

   

Preface    to the reader

   

   
   

   

The    origins of the English race and language are one; they go back to    the Saxons and Angles, peoples of Germany. Whether the Saxons took    their name from the word daggers (which they called saecae)    or (which seems to me much more likely) from Ashkenaz, the son of    Gomer -- I shall not insist. Nevertheless, however they valued    their saecae,    surely they would not have named themselves saecasons    (that is, sons of daggers), but they might, with

   

the    greatest honor to their race and due reverence to its founder,    have called themselves Sacasons    (that is, sons of Saca) from Ashkenaz, by a slight variation,    Sacae.    For scholars agree that the descendants of Ashkenaz settled there,    and the leaders of the German Jews (whose language has no small    importance in distinguishing the descendants of Noah) wished    themselves to be X, that is, dwelling among the Ashkenazites. Some    relate that the Angles formerly occupied the Cimbrian Chersonese    between Jutland and Holstein. But this corner is very small to    have sent forth a tribe so numerous that it would occupy even as    much as two counties of Anglia even though it had left its former    abodes completely stripped of inhabitants. Others prefer to say    that the Angles inhabited Scania, or Sconia,    (which is also a province of Denmark, but bordering on Sweden),    and that from there they sought other abodes, being driven thence    by the Danes. Or whether they crossed from there into Pomerania, I    do not know. But Ptolemy assigns the Angles a region above the    Elbe as far as the source of the river Calusius not far from    Mesurium (which to-day they call Magdeburg); thence he places the    Suevi and the Teutons to the West and the Saxons at the mouths of    the Elbe. Yet not only in Sconia is Engelholme the chief city of a    province, but throughout almost all of Germany traces of the    Angles are evident. The abodes of the Saxons also are too limited    in Ptolemy' s account. For it is agreed that the Saxons extended    from the lower Rhine to the Elba as far as the bay of Codanum    [Avent . Annal. Boiorum book 5]. And so, if the name Saxony has    not been given more recently to that territory which stretches    today from Marchia to Misnia and Lusatia, certainly that part of    ancient Saxony is very small. For I remember having seen "Hamburg    the first city of Saxony." But it is most probable, and it is    the belief of history, that the Saxons, who afterwards brought    Britain under their control, were those who settled around the    Ems, the Weser, and the Elbe rivers . The reason, however, for    their coming to Britain was as follows.

   

When    the Roman power had been broken and weakened, Britain was    abandoned by the Romans under Valentinian the Younger . Since the    Britons had been slain in daily battle with the Romans, and, too,    since all the remaining flower of the people had been called away    to foreign wars, their power against the Scots and the Picts was    very weak. The Scots, having crossed from Ireland long before, had    seized the northern part of the island. {n.    p.}    It makes little difference whether the Picts were Britons who,    shaking the yoke of Roman servitude from their necks, had also    migrated there, or whether they were a people originating in    Germany and called Phichti from their bravery in war. At any rate,    since they were devastating Britain and slaughtering the people    almost to extermination, King Vortigern was compelled to summon    auxiliary troops of the Saxons, by whose aid he was enabled to    slow down and check the attacks of the enemy. Thence, glory    redounded to the Saxons; peace came to the Britons. But since the    king did not meet his obligations to the soldiers, a treaty was    entered into by which he yielded Kent to the control of Hengist    and the Saxons . This was done about the year of our salvation    450. Later the treaty was secured by the giving in marriage to the    king, of Hengist's very beautiful daughter or his granddaughter,    and by the addition of large provinces to the father-in-law's    realm. This the Britons could scarcely endure; they rose in anger;    the king abdicated; they demanded King Vortimer in place of his    father; and on all sides they gave the call to arms. This reign of    Vortimer was very brief, but calamitous for the Saxons; for in the    fourth battle he so dispersed their forces that they retained    their footing in Britain with difficulty. When, however, he had    been put out of the way through the treachery of his step-mother,    Hengist returned with his followers, and what he could not    accomplish by valor, he undertook through trickery; for, having    called a conference under the pretext of arranging a peace, he    slew all the leaders of the Britons almost to a man; he took    captive Vortigern, who had been restored to the throne after the    death of his son, and in payment for his freedom took the four    largest provinces. Thus courage returned to the Saxons; thus their    strength was restored. But no power endures long. For Aurelius    impaired their strength, and the renowned Arthur defeated, broke,    and subdued their race, though he did not destroy it. Hence after    Arthur, their power grew so strong and their number so increased    that they brought almost the whole island under their control,    with the exception only of the mountains of Wales and Scotland.    Nor did the many victories of Cadwallo prevent the Saxons from    driving his son Cadwallader even to the Armorican Britons. And    (either because they wished to preserve the purity of their    language and the renown of their race, or because they were waging    wars fired by their hatred) they so raged against the very    language of the Britons that almost all names of cities, of towns,    of villages, of rivers, of passes, of forests, of valleys, and of    mountains were changed to Saxon names. Thus, about the year 680    under the Saxons as lords of affairs in Britain, the authority was    divided into seven kingdoms. In this heptarchy ravaged by the    various blasts of civil wars, now this kingdom, now that, stood    out from the others. Accordingly after Egbert as leader of the    West Saxons got possession of the power, in order to lull their    discordant minds to sleep, he gave orders for the people to be    called by one name, English, and the country itself, England    (Engeland). Thus the name of the Jutes and of the Frisians, who    had landed here with the Saxons in no small numbers, entirely sank    into oblivion. And although all were called by the common name of    Saxons, whence the very island itself was called Saxony across the    sea, still, because foremost among the Saxons was that people whom    Ptolemy called Angili, we call ourselves Angles. Thus Egbert had    sufficient reason for his name, although some devise other    reasons. These were the origins of our race and of our language;    and if one is eager to learn more of them, there are numerous    histories on this subject. Indeed, the Britannia of that most    learned and wise interpreter of our past, William Camden, will    give you complete information on this matter. {n.    p.}

   

   The    purity of our speech can be said to remain unchanging because,    beyond that change which I often deplore and [also] beyond tha t    which the passage of time is wont to bring to all discourse, no    impure mixture of foreign peoples tainted us (and this, in order    that that unbounded power and wisdom may shine forth from every    sound and meaning which can be in the human voice or expressed by    it). And although the rest of the Teutons bursting forth here,    there, and everywhere in Italy, Gaul, Spain, etc., learned the    language of the people, nevertheless, our ancestors always    retained the purity of their speech. For however much those    long-standing hatreds of the Britons and the Saxons subsided, and    however much the people joined by inter-marriages, obeyed the    power of one ruler, protected their rights by one law, and    cherished the same religious faith (a thing which is the greatest    bond of the soul), still, except in the proper names of their    families, scarcely a single British word came into common use. A    great change of affairs resulted, I confess, from that destruction    which the Danes caused and which increased in Anglia from Knut the    First to the time of Edward (that is, twenty-five years), and a    greater change, from the victory of the Normans; but truly, no    change in the language. For since the Danes were a people widely    scattered geographically, they thus had widely differing    characters, but there was indeed greater agreement in their    language with the other peoples of Germany than that which they    have to-day, as is clear, for instance, from the manifesto of Knut    on Religion, which is still extant in the Saxon tongue. Moreover,    although the Normans had changed their Teutonic speech to French,    and William the First tried in every possible way to cause the    Angles to speak in the French tongue, still that attempt was    fruitless, since after William all interest in the matter flagged.    To be sure, a considerable number of the nobles gave their    approval to the Conqueror, as did the agents of his pleasures and    as suredly his courtiers, who were eager for the possessions of    others; and for that reason, many French names survive even to    this day among a great many aristocrats. In sports also, in    fowling, and in venery, all terms are French; even our native dogs    are urged on to the kill in French, unless Tristram, which I read    as a young man, has fallen completely into disuse. There are also    many legal terms, and some words of general use. But to these a    place has been given in the Etymology.

   

   It    remains for us to see, then, what change our discourse has    undergone from the very passage of time. There are extant in    English some very ancient Glosses written on the    Evangelists about the year of Christ 700, later also some public    addresses to the people, Canons of the Church, and the like,    dealing with ecclesiastical matters. But I shall take an example    -- neither old nor new -- from Aelfric, who flourished at the time    of Edgar, whose reign had its beginning in the year of our    salvation 960. His letter to Sigeferth has this beginning:

   

   
   

   

AElfric    abb: gret Sigeferth freondlice. Me    is gesaed    that thou redest beo”    

   

I,    AElfrick abbot, greet friendly, to me it is said    speakest    by

   

me    that ic other taehte on Engliscen    gewriten other eower ancor aet ham”

   

I    teach in my English    writing then your at home

   

mid    eow taeth. forthan the he swutelice    saegth,    that it sie    alefd that messe”

   

with    you teacheth because    that he soothly    saith,    is alow’d mass

   

preostan    wel motan wifigen, and min gewriten withcwetheth thysen.”

   

priests    may take wives, my writings gainsaieth    thisn.

   

 

   

No    one is truly English who does not recognize all these words to be    his own, {B}    however they may seem to be changed by dialect. But if you should    read the authors of subsequent times, I do not know whether you    would judge that they had divested themselves of a coarse rudeness    or rather had decked themselves in a new one. Consider a few lines    from those which Michael Drayton, the Dionysius of the English    world, quotes from Robert of Gloucester concerning the walling of    London by one Ludd. See song 8 of the Poly-Olbion :

   

   
   

   

Walls    he let make al about and yates yp and doun

   

And    after Lud that was     is name he cluped it Luds toun.

   

The    herte yate of the toun that yut stont    ther and is

   

He    let hie clupie Ludgate after is     o nam iwis.

   

He    let him tho he was ded burie at thulk yate,

   

Theruore    yut after him me clupeth it Ludgate.

   

   
   

   

I    know that this rusticity of the poet, who wrote three hundred    years ago, seems awkward, but however the usage of discourse may    have developed, at the present time it seems [not] to be at its    best unless both accuracy in idiom and an intelligent proportion    of foreign words are present.

   

   Up to    this point, foreign words in the English language were unheard of.    At length about the year 1400 Geoffrey Chaucer, of unlucky omen,    by using French and Latin words rendered his poetry contemptible.    For this is the stupidity of the unlettered herd that it regards    with particular admiration that which it does not understand.    Thence there developed a new itch in writing and speaking. For    since each one wishes to seem a smatterer and to peddle his skill    in the Latin language, the French, or some other, so daily he    tames some wild beasts of words and teaches frightful and    evil-sounding magpies of unlucky birth and owls to try our words.    So to-day we are almost Englishmen who do not speak English and    who are not understood by English ears. Nor do we deem it    sufficient to have begotten this illegitimate offspring, to have    fostered this abomination, but we have driven out the legitimate    also, ours by birth, pleasing in its aspect, and acknowledged by    our ancestors. O rude speech! Everywhere I hear komon,    visεes,    εnvi,    malis,    etiam virtv,    studi,    ʒustis,    piti,    mersi,    kompassion,    profit,    komoditi,    kulor,    grās,    favor,    akseptans,    etc.        

   

   But    truly, why in the world have you cast out those terms which our    ancestors employed in place of these counterfeits? That native    words should be driven into exile? That a new barbaric invasion    may wipe out the whole English language? O, ye English! I call    upon you, I say, in whose veins pulses the blood of our native    land; keep, oh keep what yet remains of your native speech and    tread in those footprints of your ancestors which are still    visible. Or do you yourselves wish to make your language    subservient to the Romans, you whose ancestors despised Roman    arms? We have laughed enough and to spare at your     detestable exaggerations, your corrupt improprieties, and your    lamentable tortures. The     stories were even the semi-circles and triangles of your twisted    feet, -- do you wish to have your ears boxed further?    

   

   
   

   

  Physician    Mirus talks of saliuation,

   

  Of    Tophes, of pustules,    of febricitation,

   

  Who    doth ingurgitate, who doth tussicate,

   

  And    who an vlcer hath inueterate.    {n.    p.}        

   

  Thus    while his inkhorne termes be doth apply,

   

  Euacuated    is his ingenie.

   


   

   

 When    you chance to hear this, do you laugh, Wilson? And so that we may    laugh with you, recite, I beg, the dialogue between Gabritius and    Beya, who declaim in a Latin-French-English. And yet I would not    wish these things to have been said because I would repudiate all    foreign words completely, but because I would restrain the    inclination of those who reject customary words pleasing in sound    and full of meaning, merely to devise new ones, harsh to the ear,    and doubtful in sense. Nor do I think that this is permitted to us    less than to other peoples. But just as each nation freely makes    use of goods imported from elsewhere, and itself sells its own in    order to purchase foreign goods, so also any language can grow    rich from foreign resources and can share its own with others. How    many things did the Romans take from the Greeks, and after Greece    was captured, how many in turn did the Greeks take from the    Romans? And if you care to search more deeply into the origins of    the Latin language, you will find that many things were chosen    from ours. And in order to remove a few borrowed feathers from    Aesop’s little crow, I shall set down a very few examples from    many so that you may judge for yourselves from this instruction:

   

   
   

                                                                     

      Teutonic

           

      
      

           

      English

           

      Latin

           

      English

           

      Latin

      


      

                     

      Wein

           

      
      

           

      wjn

           

      vinum,

           

      wag

           

      vagus,       a, um

                     

      Wust

           

      
      

           

      wast

           

      vastus,       a, um

           

      the       West

           

       vesper

                     

      Wol

           

      
      

           

      wel

           

      valeo

           

      
      

           

      quod       in

                     

      Wollen

           

      to

           

      wil

           

      volo

           

      
      

           

      occidente       apparet

                     

      Wahlen

           

      wallow

           

      voluo

           

      
      

           

      
      

                     

      
      

           

      Wespe

           

      
      

           

      wasp

           

      vespa

           

      
      

           

      
      

                     

      
      

           

      Witwe

           

      
      

           

      widow

           

      vidua

           

      to       worrow

           

      
      

                     

      
      

           

      Wurm

           

      
      

           

      wurm

           

      vermis

           

      to       wade

           

      voro

                     

      ein

           

      Wall

           

      a

           

      al,       or

           

      vallum

           

      
      

           

      vado,       as,

                     

      
      

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      bulwark

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      Inde

      

vadum

                     

      
      

           

      Weg

           

      
      

           

      wai

           

      via

           

      
      

           

      
      

                  

   
   

   

   Here,    to be sure, note that you pronounce V    according to the ancient and correct sound by which we pronounce    W.    For no matter how often they used V    to express the Aeolic digamma, or thick F,    yet in these words and in many others it did not obtain. For V,    the neighbor of the letter F,    is rendered by β    in Greek, as in φλάβιος    et Βιργίλιος;    in    other words, by ȣ,    a s in Ουαλης    from valeo,    ουεσπασιανὸς    from vespa.    However, I would not deny that our W    is derived through V,    that is, thick F,    or even through B    itself, as from the Belgian Wall,    Teutonic Waluisch,    English Whale, Latin balaena. And just as these derivatives from    one letter present themselves, so also will he who has the leisure    to test more widely find [more instances]. For just as the dregs    of very many neighboring peoples flowed to the sanctuary of    Romulus, whence at length arose one gang of robbers, so also from    languages widely separated from each other, at length one Roman    language was produced. It was called Latin, because, just as the    greatest assemblage of criminals was derived from the Latins, so    were very many words. Therefore, since the Latins have admitted    our words, it will certainly be proper to repay this and with    interest. Thus to-day the Germans borrow many things from the    Latins, and this not merely in the case of words, but also, here    and there, in syntax. {B2}

   

   And    since our language so easily admits and voluntarily adopts foreign    words, I ask that our monosyllables in like manner may be refined    by the addition of polysyllables from other places. And since at    one time the lips of the whole world were one, and the speech one,    surely it should be desirable that the speech of all peoples    should be made one and universal by a single communion of words.    But if this were to be tried by human efforts, certainly no    language would be discovered more suitable for it than the    English. But since this is not to be hoped for from human    inclination, let us bear ourselves modestly in admitting new    words, so that we may seem to be acting under compulsion, not    wantonly. This will truly be finally accomplished when our words,    neither simple nor compound, shall gain the force and the meaning    of foreign diction.

   

   It    remains for me to say a few words about the new orthography which    I am presenting. And truly, observing that the characters of the    Saxons for the most part were not so unlike the Latin letters but    that you would easily judge that they were derived the one from    the other, and observing, too, that ours much surpassed the Latin    in beauty of style and refinement, and furthermore that in all    ancient writings our scribes exercised the greatest care in    transcribing the words according to their true pronunciation, and    finally that faultiness in writing came into existence for the    first time when our books began to be printed, I laid all the    blame for our bad spelling especially on the latter. For when that    far-seeing king, that great patron of letters, Henry the Seventh,    summoned hither from Germany the printer Wynken de Word (who was    the first to print English writings on the printing-press), the    printer had of necessity to print our words with the type which    was available. Thus for the first time th    appeared in place of ð,    g    for ʒ,    etc.    And if a misfortune not unlike this one was also added -- that the    proof-reading was not assigned to an educated man, but to some    employee who could speak both German and English -- our    orthography was inevitably corrupted; and because no suitable    correction was made, this corruption passed into common usage. And    I certainly think that this was the sole cause of the corruption.    The fact that the Germans do not have those sounds in which the    errors were especially made can also be advanced as an argument    for my theory. For they do not say thing but sed    Ding;    pro faðer,    what,    ʒosef,    Chansler;    they say vater,    Yosef,    was,    Kantzler.    If you were to correct these faults and allot their own quantities    to the letters, you have almost all the errors and certainly those    in particular which should be corrected in our writing. Indeed,    good men and well-educated ones have attacked this error, but in    vain; notably, Sir Thomas Smith, in opposition to whom Richard    Mulcaster brought out a very large book. The latter after the    great ruin of time and of good writing decided that everything    should be surrendered to Custom as if to a tyrant. He was    justified in censuring one thing in the knight; namely, that his    new characters are not pleasing in appearance or easy to write.    This defect a certain priest cured as far as he was able -- he who    assumed according to custom the name of Chester from the title of    office -- but, except that he omitted some letters very necessary    in usage, he did not intend by his characters to reproduce our    discourse, but to remodel it. I am omitting much. For it is not my    business to make myself disagreeable by depreciating valuable    achievements; nevertheless, I comment on these very few items so    that you will not think that I have directed a false charge    against a worthy man. If you want to improve our style of writing,    you will read both, because the dispute is a matter of sound only.    Thus, accordingly, he writes, folio 66, b:

   

   
   

                                                           

      Pre

           

      
      

           

      prai

           

      sed

           

      
      

           

      said

           

      iu

           

      
      

           

      

                     

      ue

           

      
      

           

      wai

           

      ei

           

      
      

           

      I

           

      iuz

           

      
      

           

      vz

                     

      se

           

      ror

           

      sai

           

      ov

           

      for

           

      of

           

      

           

      for

           

      

                     

      ðe

           

      ðei

           

      aunsuer

           

      
      

           

      answer

           

      uið

           

      
      

           

      with

                     

      bue

           

      
      

           

      buoi

           

      riding

           

      
      

           

      rëding

           

      knön

           

      
      

           

      knöun

                     

      me

           

      
      

           

      mai

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      
      

           

      
      

                  

   
   

   

    Here    you do not have our words, but the inventions of Mopseys. Wade,    however, has been content not only to stray with the priest, but    to go off imagining all by himself. Thus he did not write Lundon,    according to the general dialect, but Lunun,    according to the letter-carriers, or Luun,    according to the boatmen. Nor did he permit double consonants in    ʒon    and ʒustis,    but held that they should be written Dzyon    and dzyustis,    and this because the double consonant which begins these words    seems to be separated most nearly into these elements. We,    however, in writing down words do not separate simple sounds, but    rather we assimilate separate sounds into one. Bullokar changed    very little, but he faithfully corrected a very great deal. And    these are the ones, who, to my knowledge, have publicly claimed    the name of orthographer. I, however, maintain that one should    agree in this with Marcus Fabius: just as agreed practice in the    manners of all good men is the standard for our way of life, so in    discourse the custom of the learned is the primary law.    Accordingly all writing will have to be adjusted, not to that    pronunciation which ploughman, mere women, and ferrymen employ,    but to that which learned or highly cultivated men use in speaking    and reading. And just as skilful painters represent the likeness    of the human form so that it copies the living features, so also    will it be fitting to write down the words from the living voice    so that we may not depart a hair' s breadth from the true    pronunciation. But lest you think that I am going to contend about    pronunciation as if for our very altars, I grant that there are    four things which can somewhat alleviate the harshness of this    rule and can greatly aid orthography: 1. Derivation, 2 .    Difference, 3. Accepted custom, 4 . Dialect. Indeed I wish these    to be so strong in indifferent words that they will in no way    divert them from the truth of the matter.

   

   1    . Thus derivatives follow the writing of the primitives as divjn,    skolar,    rather than devjn,    skoler,    because, in shortened syllables where either one of two sounds is    heard without distinction, we shall decide that the origin of the    word should be followed. So, on the other hand, derivatives show    the orthography of the primitives, as personz,    not persnz,    because the o    has not yet disappeared in the derivatives personal    and personaliti.    However, the derivative must detract nothing from the true sound,    for I forbid the writing of houer,    honor,    honest,    because in these the h    is neither heard nor, indeed, either ought to be, or can be,    according to the rule which you will find on page 10; for we say    an    ouer,    mjn    onor,    ðjn    onesti,    not a    houer,    mj    honor,    ðj    honesti.    Just so an educated man, observing the origin of a word, would    write divjn,    skolar,    onor,    kunʒurer;    but if    an uneducated man, following his ears, should write devjn,    skoler,    oner,    kunʒerer,    I hold it of no consequence. 

   

    2    . Difference of meaning is indicated by orthography (as far as it    can be done and the pronunciation permits). Accordingly when you    write our,    it means our own. If you insert an e,    it would be written ouer,    an hour. For the pronunciation can show this and the meaning    requires this difference. Thus J    is I,    , ei,    eye, ëi,    aye, dézert,    a wilderness, a    dezért,    a    merit; but certainly a súbʒekt,    a subject, and    tu    subʒékt,    to subject,    are distinguished either by the sense only or by the accent. Nor    should this difference be observed in isolated words merely, but    also when they are grouped in speech. For we say mj    nativitis kast,    which can be transposed into my birth is computed, or the    reckoning of my birth. Here, therefore, the orthography mj    nativiti iz kast removes    all ambiguity. J    kanot drink wjn,    I am not able to drink wine, and    J kan not drink wjn,    I am able not to drink wine, are rendered more intelligible    through orthography. Thus, then, orthography will    not    completely conform to the pronunciation when a difference of    meaning is to be sought.

   

    3    . Nor do I indeed give too little deference to Custom, since I    believe that it should be followed everywhere except where the    true pronunciation clearly rejects it. Accordingly, it is the    common practice for us to say fk,    fât,    bâm,    hâf,    and tâk,    wâk,    wið,    ov,    agenst;    yet,    because all well-informed people do not discard the l    from    those original forms, let us here follow custom and    for    the most part derivation in fölk,    fâlt,    bâlm,    hâlf,    from volk,    fâl,    balsamum,    halb,    and in tâlk,    wâlk,    with,    oðer,    of,    against,    merely    as a custom of writing, and this,    because    some educated men read thus, and now and then speak    thus.    If words beginning with w,    namely wit,    wïn,    wash,    wäk,    wail,    wil,    have k    placed before the w,    they will of necessity become kwit,    kwïn,    kwash,    kwäk,    kwail    kwil;    nevertheless,    because I prefer to unstitch Custom gradually rather than to cut    it off suddenly, I do not object to your writing quit,    quïn,    quash,    quäk,    quail,    quil.    Proper names also will, because of a certain privilege of rank,    retain their accustomed rule or writing, no matter how commonly    the form may be distorted by error, as D'Aubigne,    D'Anuers, D'Aubridg-Court, Redklif,    Cotswöuld,    etc., which the crowd calls Daubnei,    Dauers, Dabskot, Ratlif, Cotsal.

   

    4    . Nay even when the dialect varies, I easily admit that writing    itself is the least consistent, as, farðer,    furðer,    or furder;    murðer,    or murder;    tu    flj,    or tu    flï,    tu    flït,    or tu    flöt,    etc. Moreover, in a free style there is no place for dialects    other than the common one, except where the exigency of the matter    demands it. Irregularity of all sorts is moderately granted to the    poets. 

   

    There    remain the things which I should like to ask of you, Reader:    first, that if in following the path of these studies, I have    mistakenly wandered off from the royal road of truth, either you    will set that right in accordance with your sincerity, or will    admonish me; second, that you will not reproach me too hastily for    my faulty writing, especially since I have granted that there are    four things which can change writing somewhat. Consequently, I    shall not add anything concerning accent or irregularity until I    come to that point. One thing perhaps you may complain of-- that    now and again double consonants are lacking, as in fatter,    better, robbing,    a fault indeed which we so a pprove of that (if ever the time    comes for that discussion) we shall show that those double    consonants are an error which is not to be permitted in    orthography except in such places where we may be permitted to    defend the error either because of composition or because of    irregularity. But for the present, I dismiss these matters lest I    may seem to contrive delay in your studies by a too long-drawn-out    preface. Farewell.

   

   {n.    p.}        

     

   
   

    

Libri Synopsis

                                                                                                                        

   Logonomia    Anglica partes habet 4,

     

   
   

     

   Incorrect;    in their

     

   pronunciation,    Cap.    1.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   1.    Philology

     

   Compositione    Cap.    2.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   which    concerns

     

   
   

     

   Simplicibus

     

   Vocalibus.    Cap.    3.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   the    use of letters

     

   Correct;    qui

     

   Consonis.    Cap.    4.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   est    in literis

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Proprias.    Cap.    5.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Diphthongos

     

   Improprias    ubi de

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Coniunctis

     

   
   

     

   dialectis.    Cap.    6.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   in

     

   Syllabas    et voces Cap.    7.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Primitivis

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Vocibus

     

   
   

     

   Peregrinis    Cap.    8.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Derivatis

     

   
   

     

   Compositis

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Nostratibus

     

   Comparatis

     

   Cap.    9.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   2.    Etymologiam de

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Diminuitis

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Communi

     

   Cap.    10.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Vocum

     

   Nomine

     

   Proprio

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   speciebus.    3.

     

   
   

     

   Personali.        

     

   Cap.    11.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Species    3.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Verbo;

     

   
   

     

   Cap.    12.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   cuius    sunt

     

   Coniugationes    3.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Consignificativis,    quae sunt adverbi

   

coniunctiones    etc. Cap.    13.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

   

Absoluta    Cap.    14.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Soluta

     

   
   

     

   Simplex

     

   Convenientiae    Cap.    15.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Rectionis

     

   Casus

     

   Unius    Cap.    16.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   quae    est

     

   
   

     

   Varii    Cap.    17.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Utraque

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Verbi    Cap.    18.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   aut    est

     

   
   

     

   1.    Vocū

     

   delectu    ubi

     

   Appendicibus

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   3    Syntaxin

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   tropi    4. cum

     

   et    vitiis ca.    19.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   quae    est aut

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Defectu

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Ornata

     

   
   

     

   Usu;    isque

     

   Pleonasmo

     

   Ca.    20.

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   in

     

   
   

     

   aut    in

     

   Enallage

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Poetica

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   vocis

     

   Sono.    Cap.    21.

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Cap.    24.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   2.    Sententiae ordine et sensu. Cap.    22.

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   3.    Exochis Cap.    23.

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

   

Grammatico

     

   
   

   

Cap.    25.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Accentu

     

   Rhetorico

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Syllabarum    quantitate.

     

   Cap.    26.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   4    Prosodia in

     

   Metro;    idque

   

est    aut in

     

   Pedibus    __________

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Carmine

     

   Rythmico    Cap.    27.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   Latinum    imitante Cap.    28.

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

    

 

{n. p.}

 

 

      

   
   

   


   

   

Correct    these errors before reading.    

   


   

   

Syllables    which are by nature common can be written with either long or    short vowels, indiscriminately, as    shal    or shâl,    dans    or dâns,    bi    bï,    ded    dëd,    whöm    whüm,    moðer    muðer,    sai    säi,    mai    mäi,    etc. Certain words differ in accent, as has been said, and so you    will in no wise stumble over these. Minor errors you will    overlook, and those which are here identified and acknowledged you    will correct: page 3, line 24, laqueus;    p. 4, line 12, bloud,    1. 14, querela;    page 6, line 23, distinguerent;    page 7, line16, boum;    page 8, line 1, sensim;    page 9, line 17, ð,    inuħ;    page 13, line 18, ðëz    sëz;    page 14, line 2, venefica,    line 7, dëz,    line 13, Hebr.;    page 15, the next to the last line, index;    page 17, line 27, ἰσχνότητα;    page 18, line 16 and line    18,    quaedam;    page 19, line 1, pëz;    page 21, line 24, knöun,    säving;    page 16, last line, ðï;    page 23, line 9,    Konfounded;    page 24, line 19, fürth,    line 22, trïz;    page 27, line 13, ëzment,    line 21, tëch,    tëcher,    line 22, hëring;    page 30, line 27, Konsul,    last line, ʒenerus;    page 33, line 3, forswër;    page 34, lines 11 andd 22, lëst;    page 36, last line, quatenus;    page 37, line 3, ëvs,    line 7, nonae,    line 8, bouelz,    line 20, ,    line 23, göuld,    and everywhere else that it occurs together with similar words,    such as föuld,    höuld,    etc., line 24, whët,    line 27, brëd;    page 38, last line, argentea;    page 40, line 1, mutnz,    vëlz;    page 41, line 13, pëz;    page 42, line 28, secundae:    page 43, line 15, lëvz;    page 48, line 23, dipt;    page 50, line 5,    swër;    page 51, line 18, häv,    line 26, indicentur;    page 57, line 4, Imperat;    page 59, line 1, luvz;    page 60, line 4, abröd,    line 20, rëd;    page 62, line 11, klöðier;    page 65, line 27, âlðoħ;    page 71, line 8 [43]; page 76, line 5, tëch;    page 77, line 26, unëzi;    page 83, line 3,    höp;    page 84, line 13, ;    page 86, next to the last line, Etiam;    page 87, line 10, grandes;    page 93, last line, quia    tu    tëch    doceo;    page 96, line 24, universam;    page 99, line 3, etiam,    line 8, prezum’d;    page 100, line 10, sive,    line 26, nou;    page 101 line 17, pleʒez;    page 103, line 25 and last line shï;    page 109, line 4, saepius;    page 111, line 16, mjħt;    page 112, line 5,    gaðer;    page 115, line 13, principes;    page 128, line 4,    sakklth;    page 133, line 17, forgtn,    forgíving;    page 136, line 4, Kvpid;    page 144, line 18, ljvz.

   

 Moreover,    you will correct as often as there is need the use of the    character I    for J.     Finally, in chapter 25 and following, the marking of the accents    will earn pardon for the quantity of the long vowels.    {n.    p.}

   

   

    

 

                  

   GRAMMAR    OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE.

         

   What    is, its parts, letters.

   


   

   

Chapter    I

   

Grammar    is the understanding of the rule s by which an unknown language    can be more easily learned. When observed according to the    practice of the Latin language, it is Latin; according to the    practice of the English language, it is English; and so on.

   

Its    parts are four: Philology , Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody.    Philology or Grammar (as it pleases others to call it) is that    part of grammar which concerns the number and quality of simple    and connected letters.

   

And    though much error clearly occurs in our use of letters,    nevertheless since it is commonly the practice to write and read    thus incorrectly, we shall explain in a few words first how far    incorrect usage has gone and next how far it ought to go.

   

{A}

         

   The    English have the same number, the same order,    and    the same pronunciation of letters, if they are considered    by    themselves, as the Germans and almost all the

   

other    better known Europeans have. But in the case of c,    g,    i,    s,    t,    and    y,    a few observations should be made.    C    before    a,    o,    u,    or a consonant has the same sound as    k;    before    e,    i,    and    apostrophe    (’ ),    it is sounded the same as s,    as for instance the Germans pronounce c    in cederbaum,    cedar tree,    and    in    circkel,    circle.    Also    it is    peculiar    to    the English to express by ch    that sound which    the    Italians    express by c    in piacevole.    For thus we pronounce a    chaire,    a    chair;    a    cherry;    a    chin;    chosen,    to    chuse,    to    choose.        

   

   G    before    a,    o,    or    u    is pronounced by the same sound as Germanic g,    just as it is before the consonants in glory    and grace;    before    e    or    i,    as    the Italian s regularly pronounce g    in    gentile    and    giovane,    and just as we sound g    in a    giant,    a    gibet,    gibbet,    ginger,    gentle,    changed,    and    so on.    This sound other people perhaps express by    dzy;    we    express    it by simple g    before e    or i,    but before    a,    o, u always    by the consonant    j.    For in these cases, g    and l    have    the same sound.

   

       

   

   Jason,    Dzyason,    Jason.

   

   Geffrey,    Dzyeffrey,    Geoffrey.

   

   Ginger,    dzyindzyer,    gingiber.

   

   Joseph    ,    Dzyosef,    Joseph.        

   

   A    Judge,    a    dzyudzyh,    a    judge, where dg    also sounds after u    just    as j    does before it.

   

   
   

   

   It    does not hold true everywhere, however, that g    before e    and i    is pronounced thus, for we say to    get    and to    give,    and a few others, a legitimate and primitive pronunciation.

   

   But    j    before a,    o,    and u    varies in no instance; for that sound which the Germans give to I    before a vowel, we write as y    {n.    p.}    not    as    j.    For their Jung,    is    our young,    having the same meaning and sound.

   

   In    the case of s    one thing should be noted; namely, that the English express the    frothy Hebrew character    ש    by    sh,    the    germans,    by    sch.    For example, to the English the word is    shame;    to    the Germans,    it is    scham;    the    Spanish, however, express this sound by x,    as in debaxo,    belowe.

   


   

   

Chapter    II

         

   On the composition of letters

         

   This    should be observed first of all in the composition of syllables,    that not all vowels are always pronounced, and secondly, that not    exactly the same pronunciation obtains in all of them. For    although the length of the quantity may differ in a long syllable    or in a short one, and not the similarity of sound, nevertheless    the same vowel sometimes sounds somewhat broad, sometimes more    brief, as in Hall,    Hal;    hale,    drag;    and    hall,    a    court.        The a    in the first two words is    briefer;    in the    third,    it is almost a diphthong. Moreover the lengthening of a syllable    is distinguished in writing in two ways: first,    silent e    may be    added    at the end    of    a word after an undoubled consonant,    as    in dame,    lady, a monosyllabic word, for dam    without    an    e,    or    damme    with    an    e    after a doubled consonant means the mother of some sort of animal;    second, a long syllable will be indicated by a double vowel.    Moreover the double vowel may be the same one or a di fferent one.    In    e    and    o    doubled    the the sound differs somewhat from the characteristic sound;    i.e., in grin,    a    noose,    and    greene,    green,    the sound is in the same, only briefer in the former word and long    in the second. So it is in Bucke,    male    deer, and    Booke,    book:    nor    is there any difference of sound in these except that which is    perceived in the quantity. If, however, the vowel is different,    {A2}    it    should be silent when it is the    second    element, and lengthened when it is the first, as    in seat    and    meat,    because    set    means    placed and    met,    encountered. And    granted that in the case of these long    syllables,    it is permissible for an additional final e    to    be    added fairly    commonly, for we write seat    or    seate,    meat    or    meate,    two things, however should    come to our attention here: difference and origin. For sometimes    for the sake of difference each method of lengthening is employed,    as in    boare,    a    boar, as distinguished from the verb to    bore,    to perforate.    In people,    moreover, the o    is    adopted for the sake of the origin, and the word is incorrectly    written as a trisyllable pe-o-ple,    rather    than correctly as    pïpl.    Thus we write blood    or bloud,    from the Belgian bloed,    blood, althought the syllable may be shortened to    Blud.        But there is irregularity in in those syllables which are written    ui.    For    in some, as in suit,    a    pleading case or a complaint, and in cuited,    wine,    that    is, mulled wine,    the rule which I have stated    about    disregarding the    second    vowel in pronunciation    proves    its potency as in    meat;    for we read svt    and    cvted,    written    with long    ψιλὸν,    from the French word    suire,    to    follow, and    cuire,    to    cook.    Sometimes    the rule fails as in    guild,    an    association or a hall, a place of meeting, and in guiltie,    responsible;    for    we say the    geild-hall,    and    giltie.    Moreover,    in    build,    to construct, the    groundwork has not yet been laid, for, according to his own    particular inclination, one writes    buldeth    with    ὐψιλὸν;    another,    beildeth    with    ei;    a    third,    beeldeth    with    long    ï,    and to these still a fourth adds    bildeth    with    a short    i.    Nor has it become the practice for vowels only but also    for    consonants to be added for the purpose of indicating    the    origin of a word, for we write a sygne,    a    sign, but we pronounce it a    sein;    likewise in the case of    J    disdeigne,    I    despise, we say I    disdain.        

   

   And    just as a vowel is doubled for the purpose of    lengthening    syllables, so is a consonant for the purpose    of    shortening them. For the same consonant doubled    with    e    at the end of a word adds nothing of importance in the    way    of strengthening the sound {n.    p.}    or the syllables, but it    shows    that    the preceding vowel should be produced with a    quick    sound, as in the monosyllable wanne,    pale, for to    wane    is    to grow less.    Moreover a [similar] consonant    sometimes    is equal in its power [to    shorten    a vowel], as in backe,    a    back;    lacke,    want;    for    to    bake    is to pound,    and    lake    is    a lake.    Rarely, too, a consonant further removed    [in    sound] is added, as in lambe,    a    lamb,    to    distinguish    it    from    lame,    limping.    Take    as an exception to these rules a    wombe,    a    womb,    and    to    combe,    to    comb, although antiquity and even now dialects abridge the latter    by a long    ω    sound.

   

   Moreover,    this should be heeded; namely, that these    things    which    we have said are time and again not to be    depended    upon, because, since there is no authority in our    bad    spelling, there can be no correctness where each one    is    wise or even foolish with the same profit.    

   


   

   

Chapter    III

   

Orthography

   


   

   

We    have spoken indirectly; now we shall indicate the straight path as    far as we are able. And, in order that foreigners may know our    language more easily, first, we shall present an alphabet, entire    and perfected; then, as often as there is need, we shall subjoin    examples of both types, the customary and also the new, so that    through the new, foreigners may know more correctly the customary,    and our people may see through the customary a new system of    writing, and may correct their errors.

   

   But    lest setting aside the customary after such    long    usage may seem strange or unusual to anyone, I shall    present    first of all the reasons for my e ffort, so that    each    one may decide in accordance with his own judgment    whether    or no there is sufficient reason for emending our    bad    spelling    .    

   

   And    since nothing hinders those who wish    to    know our    language    more than that great difficulty which frightens    them    away at the first glance,    namely, that they see that    the    one and the same characters    are pronounced differently, {A3}    and that it cannot be sufficiently clear which pronunciation is    rather to be employed, consideration for the human race impels me    first of all to aid foreigners and [to forge] that common bond of    human society which is strengthened by nothing so much as by the    employment of reason and of speech. Next, since we write one way    and pronounce another, no one in his right senses can defend the    falsity of our writing. Therefore I have wanted to sweep away, and    if I could, to cleanse that barbarism which has crept into our    letters and has now for a whole century become established in    them, lest, if we could not correct our errors we might seem the    most stupid of mortals; if we would not, the most slothful. And    since women, glassblowers, and painters, who heed only the sound    falling on their ears, furnish us a guide to orthography from the    true sound of the letters, shall the educated burrow like moles so    deeply that they become even more blind? But they do see, you say,    but do not approve; they endure, but do not praise. But to what    purpose do they see if not to make corrections? And do they endure    just so that our language, which is in other respects the most    cultured, the most agreeable, the most copious in expression, may    endure this continuous barbarism that has been branded upon it ? I    have sought, I confess, light from the windows whereby I have read    dier,    which    the learned write    deare,    dear,    bred,    which they write    bread,    and    thence also nakid    cum ẏ    &    bare,    for    naked    come I.    Let this then first and foremost be    given,    established,    and ordained; namely, that letters have    been    invented to differentiate the various parts of a    word    and its slightest changes. Secondly in a word of    single    import, there ought to be individual characters,    and    in like manner there should be a separate individual    sound    for individual characters lest, if two sounds,    or    three,    or more are given to the same letter, no difference    be    distinguished in the letters themselves and no difference    in    the words; and thus that which we    ordered    in the    beginning    to be established would be overthrown. In the    third    place the meaning of words ought not to be changed,    and    in like manner nothing more absurd can be contrived    than    the silent vowel, as we have said before, in    dame    and    meate.    {n.    p.}    But the shortness and length of each vowel ought    to    be sought in itself, not by other means . Having laid    down    these premises and had them granted, let us now turn    to    the matter itself.    

   

   Letters    are vowels or consonants. There are five vowels:    a,    e,    i,    o,    u.    All having more than one sound are distinct both in pronunciation    and also in writing. The short vowels are to be written in the    customary form; the long are to be distinguished by two dots    above. I shall speak more clearly about the individual letters. A    is slender or thick. Slender A    i s either short as in talôu,    tallowe,    tallow,    or long as in täl,    tale,    a story or a computation ; A    is    thick as in tâl,    talle,    tall. This sound the Germans express by aa,    as in maal,    a banquet; haar,    hair; we shall be satisfied by the single character, circumflex    â.        

   

E    is    short in this form    e,    as in    net,    a    snare;    long,    is thus    ë,    as    in nët,    neate,    i.e. the    adjective trim; the noun neate    means    every kind of cattle.

   

   I    is slender or thick. Slender I    is short or long:    the    short is indicated thus, i    as in    sin,    sinne,    a    fault;    long,    is written thus    ï,    as    in    sïn,    seene,    seen;    thick I,    however,    is almost the diphthong    ei,    but because it is a    little    thinner in sound than if we were to spread it out    into    e,    we shall retain that venerable and vigorous sound    and    at the same time also the praise which Justissimus    Lipsus    has recommended to us in    Reginâ,    in amicâ vitâ,    and    we shall indicate it by this character    j,    as    in sjn,    signe,    a    sign. The differenceof all three is seen in win,    winne,    to win;    wïn,    weene,    to    think;    wjn,    wyne,    wine.

   

   O,    little    or short is indicated after the ordinary    manner;    big O    hereafter    will be written    ö.    The difference    is    that which lies between pol,    polle,    an elegant head, and pöl,    pole    or    poale,    i.e.,    a pole, a kind of measure .

   

   V    is slender or thick : slender v    is the verb tu    vz,    to    use;    thick and short is u    as in the pronoun    us;    {n.    p.}    and    long ü    is like u    in    the    verb tu    üz,    oose,    to    flow forth, or to come forth gradually after the fashion of water    squeezed out by force.

   


   

   

Chapter    IIII

   

Consonants

   


   

   

A    reminder

   

What    I wrote concerning consonants in the first edition is based on    those fundamental rules which no force can overthrow or weaken.    Nevertheless, because suitable characters are not at hand in type,    and because they seem to be too different from the customary form    of writing, I shall conform to the usual as far as I can; and,    provided tha t I have humane readers, I shall obtain an easy    pardon, I hope; while if I defer to necessity and custom, I shall    expres a certain simple sounds by a double character. In    particular I warn you that those compound characters ch,    ng,    sh,    th,    wh,    are replaced by simple sounds only and by simple    letters.    Though it was necessary to write these in by pen    in    the first edition, hereafter you will find them printed    in    their proper form wherever there is a print shop better    equipped    with suitable type.    We    raise no objection to the classification of consonants    as    labials, dentals, etc.,    but we insist that all    of    them shall have a single sound hereafter; and we agree    with    others that b,    d,    g,    k,    p,    q,    t,    are mutes. In the case of    l,    m,    n,    r,    x,    z,    we make no change.    C    we discard    as    being an unfortunate letter,    unnecessary,    and dubious    in    its sound. When it is aspirated, however, we admit it    to    other uses. And since I am contending with ignorance,    let    me ask this question first: if    all the consonants had    one    sound among all the ancients, who are we to dare in    matters    of common right to change common principles? Why    do    we make c,    g, t,    have two sounds? If we grant that they    are    mutes, why do we frequently pronounce c    and t as s?    Why    do    we give g    before e    and    i    a certain barbarous and    foreign    sound?    But {n.    p.}    we need a remedy, not further suffering. I    come,    therefore, to those instances in which    some    change    has    been effected. D    and    t    are to    retain    their long-established    sound,    but because we frequently aspirate them, we    shall    substitute wherever thick th    occurs, the character of    our    Saxon forefathers    ð,    and wherever slender th    occurs,    we shall write it as th    itself    representing theta    θ,    as    ðis    thing,    this    thing.        

   

   The    Latin words veritas    and    feritas    are similar in    pronunciation:    the    shaping of the first letter is the    same    for each, the upper teeth being pressed down on the    lower    lip accompanied by a sort of puffing explosion of    the    breath; in v,    however, the sound is thicker and more    close    than in    f.    I would dare, therefore, to add something    to    f,    by which its own sound would be indicated, were it    not    for the fact that custom itself permits us to express    that    middle    β    or    thick π    by the consonant    v,    as    fail,    be    wanting, and    vail,    a    veil.        

   

   The    Greek X,    ch,    which we never employ at the beginning    of    a word, but frequently in the middle and at the    end,    and which we express badly by gh,    we shall hereafter    write    thus    ð,    as in    waiħt    inuħ,    weight    inough,    weight    enough.        

   

   Q    we    wish to outlaw, because k    is sufficient for use; moreover it rarely occurs except in those    words which    we    have borrowed from the Latin. But because it does not    change    its sound, and is content with one position only    –before    u--we    permit it to march under the banner of the    letter    K.        

   

   N    is    among those letters which we have said make    no    change, but if k    or g    follows it, our statement must    be    altered a little, for, if you consider it carefully,    it    is not produced so clearly in thank    and think    as it is    pronounced    in hand    and    nön,    none.    But let us not seem to    turn    up our noses so much that we can not endure    anything    putrid    with age; for the k    there is heard clearly, and I    do    not think it suitable to alter anything bordering on    truth--I    have only wanted to remind you, not to provoke    you against your will. But because there is no sound of the letter    g    when follows n,    a s in    {B}    thing,    and    song,    but instead clearly another semi-vowel which differs from n    no    less than from m,    the letters ng    will be one of those pairs by which I wish it to be correct to    indicate a simple sound, as in sing    and among.    And in connection with this, note those instances in which g    is separated in a measure from n    under the influence of a following liquid, as a    spangl,    a spangle, tu    intangl,    to entangle.        

   

   W    and    y    have thus far had an uncertain history, for    they    have not been content to keep their place only before    a    vowel, but have coalesced with preceding vowels into    diphthongs,    as in straw    for    strâu,    straw,    law    for    lâu,    law,    ewer    for    ëuer,    ewer;    so also y,    in ioy,    for    ʒoi,    joy,    they    for    ðei,    they,    etc.;    also    among    the ancients has stood for the first person singular pronoun, a s        for    I.    But if    any    fair judge of sounds should carefully consider the use    of    these letters among us, he will find that they are consonant s.    For just as we put an,    mjn,    ðjn,    before    words beginning with a vowel, as an    unkl,    an    uncle;    mjn    aunt,    my    aunt, so before w    and    y    at the beginning of a word we employ a,    mj,    ðj,    just as we do before the other consonants, as a    water,    mj    wurd,    my    word.    Therefore, so that they may    assume    their proper position and force, we order them to    assume    the properties of consonants and to precede other    vowels,    not to follow, as in these words,    a wäst,    waste,    a    desert;    a    wel,    a    well;    a    wjnd,    wynd,    wynde;    a    world;    wud,    woodde,    a    forest;    yarn;    a    yelk,    yolk    of an egg;    yis,    yes;    a    yök,    yoke;    yuth,    youth.    And if this is the touchstone    for    the    consideration of consonants, then h    also will be a consonant    rather    than a simple aspirate. For anyone who    would    write or say    Hï brouħt mï tu mjn hors,    instead    of    mj    hors,    he    brought    me to my horse, would be too fastidious a    philologist    .

   

   Aspirate    W    is    a consonant {B2}    which    is ordinarily    written    as wh,    although the aspirate precedes. For those    words    which are written with wh    can, and certainly, in accordance    with    the examples of our ancestors, should be    written    with hw    or hu.    For nothing else could be inferred    from    such a spelling than that which we    know    from wh    itself,    as,    wïl    or    uïl,    weele,    a    trap, and    hwïl    orhuïl,    wheele,    a    wheel.    Nevertheless because our experience    teaches    us that wand    wh    are true and simple    consonants    in    the    producing of which u    only grunts a little and is not    heard    as a clear vowel, for that reason the w    before    vowels    or diphthongs will have its allotted function, but    wh    will solely from bad habit, retain its force in what,    wheðer,    whether,    and the like.

   

We    have now reached    sh,    shä,    ch,    che    and    ʒ,    dzyï.    The first is indeed a simple sound representing the Hebrew        with    the dot on the right; the last, ch    and    ʒ,    are    double    consonants. For if you put t    before that sh    you    have    tsh;    if d,    you have dsh,    except that here s    turns    somewhat    into z.    Accordingly we shall represent the first    of    those three sounds by s,    the aspirate by sh    though it    ought    to be written by one symbol only since it is a    simple    sound, as in tu    shäv,    to shave. The second sound    we    shall represent by ch,    as chäst,    chaste; in the third    instance    the Saxonʒ    ut in ʒuʒ,    iudg,    judge;    ʒuʒment,    iudgement,    judgment.    You have the    sound    and a    reasonable    form, not forbidding in appearance,    nor    difficult to write. Now behold, then, the alphabet,    whole    and perfected. If you count the letters, you will    find    twenty-f our: a,    b,    ch,    d,    e,    f,    ʒ,    h,    i,    k,    l,    m,    n,    o,    p,    r,    s,    t,    u,    w,    x,    y,    z.    If you consider their    nature,    you will find forty, --six more than the Russians    have,    or the Serbs,    or    the Croatians. The alphabet    follows.    {n.    p.}

         

   Character

     

   name

     

   nature

     

   new    use

     

   old    use

     

   meaning

     

   
   

         

   A.    a.

     

   a.    exile

     

   breve

     

   mal

     

   mal

     

   mariola

     

   
   

         

   AE.    ä.

     

   â.    Exile

     

   longum

     

   mäl

     

   male

     

   mas

     

   
   

         

   A.    â.

     

   a.    latum

     

   longum

     

   mâl

     

   mall

     

   marcus

     

   
   

         

   B.    b.    

     

   bï.    Bee

     

   b.    latinum

     

   a    briʒ

     

   bridge

     

   pons

     

   
   

         

   Ch    ch

     

   che

     

   ch:

     

   tu    chanʒ

     

   change

     

   muto

     

   
   

         

   D.    d.

     

   dï.    Dee

     

   d.    latinum

     

   dëth

     

   death

     

   mors

     

   
   

         

   Đ.    ð.

     

   ðï.    Thee

     

   δ    Oxoniensiū

     

   ðoħ

     

   though

     

   quamvis

     

   
   

         

   E.    e.

     

   Ε

     

   ε’ψιλὸν:

     

   best

     

   best

     

   optimus

     

   
   

         

   Є.    ë

     

   Η

     

   Ητα:    η.        

     

   bëst

     

   beast

     

   bestia

     

   
   

         

   F.    f

     

   ef.

     

   φ    ut    in

     

   fjn

     

   fine

     

   nitidus

     

   
   

         

   V.    v.    

     

   ve.

     

   β    Oxoniensiū

     

   vjn

     

   vine

     

   Vitis

     

   
   

         

   G.    g.

     

   ga.

     

   nil    mutat

     

   gud

     

   good

     

   Bonus

     

   
   

         

   ʒ.

     

   ʒi.

     

   dzy,    j, dge.

     

   a    baʒ

     

   a    badge

     

   hoc    insigne

     

   
   

         

   H.    h.

     

   he.

     

   nil    mutat

     

   höli

     

   holy

     

   sanctus,    a,    um

     

   
   

         

   ħ.    ħ.

     

   eih.

     

   ϰ    gr. gh

     

   boħt

     

   bought

     

   emptus,    a,    um

     

   
   

         

   I.    i,    

     

   i.    i.

     

   tenue    breve

     

   kin

     

   kinne

     

   cognatio

     

   
   

         

   I.    ï.

     

   i.    ï.

     

   tenue    longū

     

   kïn

     

   keene

     

   acutus

     

   
   

         

   J.    j.

     

   j.    ei.

     

   Exile

     

   kjn

     

   kyne

     

   vacca

     

   
   

         

   K.    k.    

     

   ka.

     

   nil    mutant

     

   kap

     

   cappe

     

   pileus

     

   
   

         

   Q.    q.

     

   qu.

     

   quins

     

   quince

     

   malum    cydoneum

     

   
   

         

   L.    l.

     

   el.

     

   läzi

     

   lasie

     

   ignavus

     

   
   

         

   M.    m

     

   em.

     

   mün

     

   moone

     

   luna

     

   
   

         

   N.    n.

     

   en.

     

   nün

     

   noone

     

   meridies

     

   
   

         

   G.    ng.

     

   eng.

     

   ng    aut ע    ut

     

   dung

     

   dung

     

   fimus

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   malè

     

   pronūciatur

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   O

    ω

   . o.          

   o.

     

   Oμιϰρὸν        

     

   tu    kol

     

   to    coll

     

   collum    amplecti

     

   
   

         

    .    ö.

     

   ö

     

   ωμε’γα

     

   a    köl

     

   a    coale

     

   carbo

     

   
   

         

   P.    p.

     

   pï.

     

   nil    variant

     

   tu    prëch

     

   preach

     

   concionor    [n.    p.]

     

   
   

         

   R.    r.

     

   ar.

     

   tu    run

     

   to    runne

     

   curro

     

   
   

         

   S.    s.    s.

     

   es.

     

   a    sun

     

   a    sonne

     

   filius,    aut

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   or    sunne

     

   sol

     

   
   

         

   Sh.    sh.    sh

     

   sha

     

   ש    sh

     

   shäm

     

   shame

     

   pudor

     

   
   

         

   T.    t.    

     

   tï    tee

     

   nil    variat

     

   

     

   two

     

   duo

     

   
   

         

   Th.    th.

     

   thï

     

   θ    th

     

   a    thistl

     

   thistle

     

   carduus

     

   
   

         

   V.    v.

     

   v

     

   ὐψιλὸν

     

   svr

     

   sure

     

   certus

     

   
   

         

   U.    u.

     

   u

     

   u    breve

     

   spun

     

   spunne

     

   netus,    a,    um

     

   
   

         

   ü.

     

   ü

     

   u    longum

     

   a    spün

     

   spoone

     

   cochleare

     

   
   

         

   W.    w

     

   we

     

   w    German

     

   wet

     

   wette

     

   udus

     

   
   

         

   wh.

     

   whe

     

   hu

     

   tu    whet

     

   tu    whet

     

   acuo

     

   
   

         

   X.    x,

     

   ex

     

   nil    mutat

     

   ax

     

   ax

     

   securis

     

   
   

         

   Y.    y.

     

   ya

     

   i    lat. ante

     

   a    yuth

     

   a    youth

     

   iuvenis

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   vocalem

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   Z.    z.

     

   ez

     

   nil    variat

     

   zël

     

   zeale

     

   zelus

     

   
   

    

 

                    

   Its    greatest use is at the end of words,    az,    ðez,    sez,    as these seas.        

         

   
   

   

Therefore    the letters as related to their sound are these    

   


   

         

   b

     

   d

     

   g

     

   v

     

   Hic    non opus est    exemplis. [B    3]

     

   
   

         

   p

     

   t

     

   k

     

   f

     

   
   

         

   wh

     

   ut

     

   which        

     

   which

   

witch

   

this

   

thistle

   

a    tunne

   

a    tongue

   

these

   

sawe

   

Shawe

   

chaw

   

iawe

     

   que

     

   
   

         

   w

     

   wich

     

   venefica

     

   
   

         

   ð

     

   ut

     

   ðis

     

   hic

     

   
   

         

   th

     

   thistl

     

   carduus

     

   
   

         

   n

     

   ut    a

     

   tun

     

   dolium

     

   
   

         

   ng

     

   tung

     

   lingua

     

   
   

         

   z

     

   ut

     

   ðez

     

   hi

     

   
   

         

   s

     

   sau

     

   viderunt

     

   
   

         

   sh

     

   shau

     

   savum

     

   
   

         

   ch

     

   chau

     

   mandentem

     

   
   

         

   ʒ

     

   ʒau

     

   mandibula

     

   
   

    

 

Also the aspirated h and ħ are similar to Hebrew letters ה and ח, the Greek ( ‘ ) and χχ. The rest of the consonants, l, m, r, x, y, and the five vowels are unique, each in its own sound.

 

Chapter V

Proper Diphthongs

 

Diphthongs are either proper or improper. I call those proper which are in use among men of cultured speech; and those improper which only dialects employ. A is placed before e as in aerj, aerie, airy; never before o; fairly often before i and u as in aid, bait, laun, a kind of muslin, and a paun, a pawn. Notice that in the latter, au differs not at all from â, for we pronounce with the same sound a bâl, ball, a ball, and tu bâl, baule, to bawl. But where the a is truly part of a diphthong, the a is reduced to â, as âu, awe, and âuger, an auger. {n. p.}

E is rarely placed before a unless perchance r follows, for we say an Earl, so that the a is slightly heard. In other cases such as ëgl, eagle, ëz, ease, tu ët, eate, to eat and the like, the a is wrongly inserted since it is silent. Nor is e commonly placed before i, for we say hëi, as a term of encouragement of praise, ei, eye, eye, and also ëi, aye, where the sound of the vowel differs slightly from that which is heard in ðjn, thine, and mjn, mine. E preceded o in the writings of our forefathers, for they wrote and pronounced eower, which to-day we write your, a custom which I think was practiced in other words where we place y ahead. E commonly precedes u, as in ëu, eawe, ewe, fëu, fewe, few, and sëuer, sewer, a table servant.

I unites with e to form a diphthong in dïer, a deer or dear, as j also in fjer, fire, hjer, hire, etc. I is affixed to the other vowels forming diphthongs, as in wai, way, ei, eye, ʒoi, joy, tu akquit, or akqujt, to free or absolve.

O on several occasions precedes i, as in toiz, toyes, toys, and in the triphthong buoi, boy, but boi is a dialect pronunciation of the North. Now and then instead of o we use ü before i without distinction. For we say toil or tüil, toil; broil or brüil, a tumult; soil or süil, dirt.

In front of the vowel u we place either omicron (o) or omega (ö), as in bound, sound; ö as in blöun, blown, thröun, throwne, thrown. So also do a bou, bough, and a böu, bowe, a bow, differ, as well as a boul, a wooden ball, and a böul, bowle, a bowl. Ü precedes i in ʒüint, ioint, a joint; in brüil, broile, broilo; büil, boile, boil; in büi, boy, an anchor maker. {n. p.}

And yet in the bringing out of all diphthongs, the whole sound does not everywhere accord with each vowel. For the preceding vowel time and again seems to sound more noticeably and clearly; for instance, in ai and ei, it so fills the ears that it would be more proper for the i to be an addition than to be fastened to the side of the a and e. Aeri is almost a trisyllable; earl with some people has the value of a diphthong, again ërl is heard, and elsewhere erl. However, we shall discuss later what variation of vowels or diphthongs is caused by the accent.

And who, now, that has ears will deny that the English language is by far the most pleasing since so many different sounds, so many letters, so many familiar diphthongs, except the improper ones, regulate it?

 

Chapter VI

Dialects and something also concerning improper diphthongs .

 

There are six principal dialects: common, northern, southern, eastern, western, and poetic. I neither know nor have heard all the idioms of these, but what I do remember, however, I shall state as well as I am able. Ai for j is northern, as faier for fjer, fire, as well as au for ou, as gaun, or even geaun for goun, a gown, and au for ü, as waund for wünd, wound, a wound. Northern, too, is the frequent use of ea for e, as meat for mët, meat, and of ea for o, as beað for both. Also, among my fellows in Lincoln you will hear toaz and hoaz for töz, toes, and höz, hose. They also npronounce kest or even kusn for kast, cast; fula for folön (follow); klöth for kloth, cloth; and on the contrary, spokn for spökn, {n. p.} spoken; dün for dun, done; and tüm for tjm, time; rjch for rich; ðör for ðër, there; brïks for brichez, breeches; seln for self; hez for hath; aus for âlso; sud for shüld; J’l, Jst, or even ai’l, aist for J wil, the sign of the future; so also in the rest of the persons, ðou’l or ðoust for ðou wilt, ðou shalt, and so on, hï’l or hïst; wïl, you’l or youst; ðei’l, ðeist, or ðei sal. In ai, Northerners throw away the i, as for pai, pay; for sai, say; and sed for said. For u et ü they substitute v, as in gvd-kvk instead of gud kük, a good cook. Moreover, they have devised some words in place of the usual ones, such as strunt and runt for rump; sark for shirt; gang for go, and thence gangrel, a beggar; and even now, for went they retain from their forefathers yed or yöd, I went.

The Southerners use ü for ï, as for , he; v for f, as vil for fil, fill; tu vech for fech, fetch; and vice versa they use f for v, as fineger for vineger, vinegar; ficar for vicar, vicar. They also have o for a, as in ronk for rank, the adjectives rancid or luxuriant—the noun also indicates rows in a battle-line or others. For s they substitute z, as zing for sin; and Ich for J, I; cham for J am, I am; chil for J will, I will; chi vör yi for J warant you, I assure you. In ai also after the separation of the diphthong, they prolong the a disagreeably, as to päi, pay; ðäi, they. 

The Easterners, on the contrary, shorten their speech for the most part, for they say fïr for fjer, fire; kiver for kuver, cover. They use ea for a, as to deans for dans, dance; v for f, as velöu for felöu, fellow; z for s, as zai for sai, say. Moreover our crude Mopseys greatly affect that attenuated thinness of pronunciation which so shortens all sounds that they seem to shudder at a and o as much as Appius Claudius shuddered at z. So also ours do not buy laun and kämbrik, a species of muslin, but lën and {C} kembrik; nor do they eat käpn, a capon, but këpn and almost kïpn. They never feast upon bucherz mët, butchers meate, meat for from the butchers, but biccherz mït. And since they are all ʒintlimin, not ʒentlwimen, gentlewomen, they do not call their maids maidz but mëdz. Moreover, what I have said about a I now recant, for whenever ô should be heard strongly, they yield the place to a. Accordingly time and again they chirp at me: I pre ya gï yar skalerz lïv ta plë for I prai you giv yür skolars lëv tu plai, I pray you, give your scholars leave to play.

But among all the dialects, none savors of such rusticity as the Western, especially if you listen to the country people in Somersetshire; for you could easily wonder whether they are speaking English or some foreign idiom. For they retain even now certa in old forms, as sax for plough-share, nem or nim, take. Indeed, they have thrust in certain of their own words in place of English words, as lax for part, toit for a stool, and so one. Moreover, they corrupt legitimate words, some in usage, some in pronunciation, as wïz wai for bridle; wïtpot for sausage; ha vang, throw here, pr even catch what has been thrown; likewise, hï vangd tu mi at ðe vant, i.e. he answered as godfather for me at the font; zit am, sit down; zadrauħ for assay ðerof, taste; hj iz gön avisht for a fishing, he has gone to fish. So also they bring out throttïn for thirtin, thirteen; narger for naröuer, narrower; zorger for mör soröuful, more sorrowful. They also place i before past participles beginning with a consonant, as ifrör or ivrör, for frözn, frozen; hav yi idü for dun, have you done? Further, they have this peculiarity, that they alter irregular nouns of either number ending in z in order to indicate the number; for instance, höz, hose, singular and plural, with the remains höz in the singular, but in the plural becomes hözn. {n. p.} So also pez, pease, either singular or plural, with them commonly becomes in the plural pëzn, pease.

The common dialect is occasionally ambiguous, for you will hear inuf and inuħ, inough, enough; ðai or ðei, they; tu flït or tu flöt, floate, float; hâlberd, halberd, or hölberd, two-edged axe; and likeweise toil, tüil; soil, süil; bjld, bild, bvld, as has been noted previously.

Dialects are permissible to poets alone of the writers; yet they refrain from using these with the exception of the common one, unless they use the northern fairly frequently for the sake of rhythm or enjoymen. For it is the most charming, the oldest, the purest, seeing that it is the closest to the speech of our ancestors. But because Grammarians defend their own dialect on the grounds of license alone, more will be said about that when we came to pronunciation.

What I say here concerning dialects, I would wish you to know, pertains only to country people, for among more gentle natures and those more carefully nurtured, there is everywhere one speech, both in sound and in meaning. As for that poisonous and fetid ulcer of our country, I am ashamed to mention it. For that utterly foul dregs composed of begging vagabonds not only has no proper dialect, but an expression or a speech which no punishment of the laws will ever restrain, until the courts are compelled by a public edict to crucify its authors. But because this whole dialect, together with the most dangerous filth of these lees, has been described in an extraordinary book, and because it has no advantage to offer to outsiders, I shall exclude it from my discourse.

 

Chapter VII

The Syllable

I shall pass over the common notions of grammarians about syllables and note in those of our language a unique characteristic and one which occurs in no other language with which I am acquainted; namely, that some syllables consist of consonants only. Of course, in syllables of this sort, some one of the liquids {C 2} must be present, either with a mute or alone, as in brj-dl, bridle, and tj-tl, title. And although words of this sort are commonly written with the vowel e affixed at the end, as brydle, saddle, tytle; that e is nonetheless silent, just as it is also in those words where only one liquid occurs; as for instance in oxen, we read ox-n, not ox-en. For nothing more is heard in the last syllable than is heard in nor when you take away the or. Accordingly we should write bidn, bidden, not bidden; öpn, open, not op-en, sadl, saddle, not sadle. Now this is sufficient grammar to enable you to read; so try

 

Kontent whü livz with trj’d estät,

Kontent who liues with tryd estate;

Content who lives with tried estate

Nïd fër no chanʒ of frouning fät:

Neede feare no change of frouning fate:

Need fear no change of frowning fate.

 

But hï ðat siks, for unknöun gain,

But he that seekes for unknowne gaine,

But he that seeks for unknown gain,

 

Oft livz bj los, et lëvz with pain.

Oft liues by losse, and leaues with payne.

Oft lives by loss, and leaves with pain.

 

Please pardon me for translating word for word for your sake and thus veiling the beauty of the Latin expression. But now for further facility in reading, try reading one Psalm or another, this time without interpretation.

 

ETYMOLOGY

Chapter VIII

Primitives and Derivatives

 

Etymology is the second subdivision of grammar and treats of how words are derived, one from another. A word is either primitive or derived. I call primitive a word whose origin is not to be found in our language, for example, bäb, babe, an infant; fish; tu flater, to flatter. For however much we seem to have derived bäb or flater from the French, or however much they and we, too, have preserved them from the ancient Teutons (for one must not think that all the words which we have in common with the French have been transferred by them to our usage, but rather that such words, and particularly those which have not been transmitted from the Latin, have endured from the Teuton ancestors of both the French and the English), and however much we may have fish or vish in common with the Germans, and that perhaps from the Latin pisce, fish, yet because these words have no prior root in the English tongue, they are to be adjudged English primitives. For if we were to grant no primitives to languages except those which can not be derived from elsewhere, we assuredly would reduce all the wealth of Europe to the greatest poverty. Accordingly we shall adjudge to be primitives those words which do not originate in our language, and derivatives, those words formed from these primitives; as for instance, from the original bäbj, baby, tu babl, to lisp after the manner of infants, a babler, one who makes sounds like an infant, babling, chattering, a bäbl, a trifle. And so with the rest.

Derivatives, moreover, are of two kinds: native and foreign. Native derivatives are nouns, verbs, or adverbs. {n. p} On the subject of native proper nouns, our illustrious Verstegan and the author of British Remains have written so fully that there is no need here to add anything further. But since they wrote in English, I must remind you that almost all first names have been derived from the Hebrew, the Greek, or the Latin, or have been retained until now by the Saxons. Family names, however, are almost all Saxon, with the exception of a few British and some which have remained among the descendants of those who came over with William I from Normandy. Scarcely four surnames can be found. Of the common nouns, certain ones are formed by the ending , as tilaʒ, tillage, poundaʒ, what is separated into individual pounds; others, by the ending ment, as ëzment, easement, käzment, casement; others, by the ending hed or hüd, as lustihed, pleasantness, from lusti, pleasant, bruðerhüd, brotherhood, from bruðer, brother. Some end in [nes], as, riħteusnes from riħteus, hardines from hardi, hardy; others end in ship, as Lordship, from Lord. Moreover, every verb produces a noun of agent ending in er, as lerner, one who learns, from lern, learn, tëcher, one who teaches, from tëch, teach. Furthermore, those words ending in ing which come from verbs are both nouns of action and adjectives, as hëring, the faculty of hearing, and hearing.

Many adjectives are derived by the addition of ish to the root, as fülish, foolish, from fül, foole, and these are almost inceptive, as sâltish, inclining to a salt taste, from sâlt, salt. Then there are adjectives in lj, as gudly, goodlie, goodly, from gud, good; and an endless number of adverbs, as fäierlj, beautifully, from fäier, beautiful. Many adjectives are formed by adding i, as hardi, hardy, from hard; so also from tröu, think, is formed trv, thought or true, thence trust and trusti, faithful, i.e., that in which trust can be placed. Certain others end in sum, as tuilsum, troublesome, from tuil; fulsum, more than enough so that it causes nausea, from ful, full. There are others ending in ward, as toward, adjective and preposition, from tu, to, bakward, behind and also backwards from bak, back. Likewise all compounds are derivatives, as wurkman, workman, from wurk, word, and man; tu understand, to understand, from under and stand. Here belong also comparatives, diminutives, and likewise words made from proper nouns and from verbs, all of which will be discussed later.

Some foreign words are taken over intact; these are especially the ones whose meanings have become known along with the words themselves, such as the Spanish barricada, a kind of fortification made of branches woven together after the fashion of a wide-mouthed jar, and filled with earth; and borracha, a kind of bottle made of animal skin. From the Italians we have for veluto di tre peli,thrï pjl velvet, three pile velvet. Thus out of necessity we use the words of these nations, rarely for any other purpose except perhaps to indicate a joke, or to air our knowledge, as for example braväda, bona roba, etc. We also borrow some words from the Americans, as maiz, Indian wheat, and kanoa, a boat hollowed out from the trunk of a tree by means of fire and flint-stones. We have reluctantly adopted a very few French words, for when William the First laid claim to his rights by force of arms, in order that his followers, more powerful in war than in learning, might be empowered to give judicial decisions, he ordered the ancient laws of the Saxons, which were written in Latin, to be turned into French, adding some of his own, but in his own idiom. Hence it came about that, except for a few Saxon terms which could be translated neither into French nor into Latin, almost all law terms are foreign, for all formulae for briefs, and almost all those of the plaintiff and of the defendant are Latin; but those who review the decrees of the judges write all of these in some barbarous language, which, however, approximates the French. Still we have admitted freely numerous words from the French. {n. p.} For since the kings of England held under their control for about four hundred years very large provinces in France, what else could result except that a free and friendly people should transport from there many words which they naturalized along with the people themselves? Thus we have transferred many words from the French, but especially those in which traces of the Latin language are evident, as sustenans, sustenance, maintenans, the addition of reason or of nourishment, from manu and teneo. Redvite, is a recent word, from reduco, meaning a fortification made for a particular time or convenient season. But belonging to us by long usage, are gräs, grace, and fäs, face, from gratia and facies, many, many more which have come over to us intact. We have also altered a good many, as impregnabl, impregnable, from imprenable from prehendo; so also tu embelish, from embellir, to adorn, from bellus, tu impoverish, to impoverish, from pobre, a poor man, tu re-kon-per-sev from re-con-per-ce-voir, from capio.

We have made some of our words from the Greek, as zël from ζηλος, and we have adopted a great many scientific words such as zodiak, horjzon, hvpotenvsa, perikranium, etc. Now I come to the Latin. And if there is room for complaint anywhere, here is the place; for leisure and literature have inflicted a greater disaster upon the English language than has any fierceness of the Danes, or any devastation of the Normans at any time. For besides those very few words which our ancestors seem to have endowed with citizenship, as wjn, from vinum, wäst, from vastus, etc., (if indeed they themselves did not appropriate these from the Teutons), an endless throng of words has crept in, which the succeeding generation adopted, a veritable itch of forging new words.

From Latin words in tas, there is an infinite crop of nouns in ti, as kommoditi, hvmaniti , perspikviti, some of which have undergone syncope, such as bounti, unless you prefer a derivation from the French bonté. So also with the same meaning is larʒis, from largitas. To Latin {D 3} words in io is administered freedom of treatment, for if you add n you will find running about the marketplace opinion, kommendäsion, salutäsion. Nor have we made only the legitimate offspring our country-men, but also the illegitimate and false dilapidäsion, fruisiön, dominion. Those in mentum throw away the um, as dokvment, monvment. Tudo is shortened to tvd, as multitvd, ingratitvd. Order from ordo is the only one of its kind. Go is variously altered, as virʒin from virgo, marʒent from margo, imäʒ from imago, but virägo remains unmarred. Tura throws away the final a, as literatvr, scriptur. On this pattern we have invented a few, as indentvr, a bond, and adventvr, money or goods invested in an uncertain venture. But overtvr, something which is made for the purpose of covering, from over, above, is wholly ours. Those in ans and ens change the s to t, as vigilant, prudent. Conversely antia and entia change to ans and ent as temperans and konfidens from temperantia and confidentia. Certain others, however, add an i, as impotensi, konstansi. Verbals in bilis end in bl, as komparabl, imposibl, inkredibl. Others in lis lose the two final letters, as fjnal, material, meridional. Here belong also sutl from subtilis and metl from metallum. Those that terminate in ca end in kl, as manikl from manica, as well as tvnikl. To these add sanikl from the herb sanicula.

Those words ending in ilium are variously altered, as consilium, kounsel; exilium, exjl. A good many ending in tus are shortened by losing the last two letters, as temperat, substitvt, as well as benign or beningn from benignus, and condign or condingn from condignus. Certain words remain unchanged, as konsul, and a great many in or, as doktor, superior, moderator; so also, many in us as perspicvus, illustrius, kommodius. The latter, however, are comparatives in the Latin, but with us, merely positives. We have coined certain words like these, for example, ʒenerus, i.e. generous,fämus, famousu, glorius, glorious. {n. p.} which seem more allied, however, to those artificial words of the French ending in eux. To this last class belong also profit and profitabl, profitable, from proficio.

Truly indeed the forms of verbs from Latin words are varied. Certain ones are derived from the stem itself, as tu defend, tu defraud; tu redvs is formed from reduco. Those in ico throw away the last syllable, as tu magnifj, tu multiplj; for we have thrown tu suplikät, tu explikät to the winds. Certain verbs spring from nouns, as tu impart from pars, tu importvn, to importune, from importunus, tu intimät, to intimate, from intimus..

From verbals also in tus and sus, we have a tremendous number of words, as, a substitvt, a noun, and tu substitvt, to substitute, from substitus; so also tu insens, to stir to wrath, from incensus, and tu suppöz, to suppose, from suppositus. But whereas there are words of this sort in use, those which are made from the stem itself, such as, tu propön, tu expön, etc., have not maintained themselves.

If anyone wishes to inquire more carefully into those which have been omitted here, let him consult the etymological dictionary of John Minsheu.

 

Chapter IX

Composition, the Comparative, the Diminutive

 

From the ordinary relationships of words by which etymology is discerned, these remain to be treated. Compounds which we have adopted from other languages become known from their own rules. We {n. p.} form nouns such as göldsmith, a goldsmith, horsman, a horseman. Here belong nouns in dum for from the verb tu dïm, to deem, is made dum, a judgment or decision, and thence the compound wizdum, wisdom, properly the decision of the wise, and kingdum, a kingdom, where a king speaks justice or a judgment. Adjectives also are compounded, such as,trvsïming, seeming true, or the two, praiz-wurðj, worth of praise. The adjectives abl, able, ful, full, les, less, and ljk, like, very frequently lend themselves to composition, and all thus compounded are adjectives, as,sälabl, for sale, höpful, full of hope, höples, without hope, warljk, warlike. But if the adjective precedes, the whole word will be either a noun, as hâpeni, halfepenni, a halfpenny, or an adverb, as ljkwjz, likewise. Munger is inseparable and denotes one who has a commodity for sale, as fishmunger, a dealer in fish. Compounding is also made with the personals, as self-wild, self-willed, and self-ljking, self-indulgence; and again the personals are compounded with each other, as him-self, whatsooðer, whatsoother. Moreover, from inseparable consignificants prefixed to words, there are some intensives, as a and bi: with a [are made] tu amät, to terrify, tu avér, to assert vehemently as the truth, and often assimiliated with the consonant of the word, as, tu assúr, to assure, tu akknöuleʒ, to acknowledge, tu adʒuʒ, to adjuge; with bi, tu bitäk, to betake, tu bithink, to bethink. There are certain ones also having a negative quality, as un and dis; as, unbid, unbidden, unblest, unblessed, dispiteus, pitiless, tu dispraiz, to blame. N in these examples is by itself: nauħt, defective or bad, and nöuħt, nothing, from not and auħt, anything So also nothing is formed from no and thing, and in use in olden times was tu nil, to be unwilling, from wil, to wish. Mis is an inseparable and means badly or wrongly, as tu mistäk, to understand wrongly {n. p.} tu mispläs, to place wrongly, mj mjnd misgivz mi, my mind predicts some evil. To mis add also for, as tu forswer, to swear falsely. Inter or enter from the verb tu enter, a consignificant word formed by us in common with many peoples, is inseparable and always precedes in composition, as, interchanʒ, interchange, tu intermeddl, to intermingle, to irritate the skin with the hoofs, [as when a horse, as it trots, strikes continually one ankle with the other hoof and so causes a sore spot to develop]. So-ever, however, always follows and corresponds to Latin cunque, as whüsoever, whosoever, whensoever, whenever. We also join Latin inseparables with our own words, for instance, tu return, tu disalou, to disallow, tu impair or empair, to make worse or less. Among these record tu kounterchanʒ, to counterchange. The remaining prepositions according to their meaning are placed before nouns, as outlet, inlet; or before verbs, as tu overtäk, to overtake, tu understand, tu withhöld, to withhold, tu welkum, to welcome; or before verbals, as förgoing, foregoing, forlorn, abuvsaid, sais above; or before other consignifications, as without, within.

 

And since a very large number of our words are monosyllables and freely offer themselves in composition, scholars should apply themselves to this with much greater attention and even with greater advantage so that they may declare their thoughts by an appropriate compounding of our own words, and may make a language already most rich in itself also abundant to the point of extravagance (if they should desire to go that far), rather than hide its native beauty under a foreign disguise. I turn this business over to the scholars only so that the ignorant and the somewhat rash may not exhibit Nereus creatures with their turned-up-snouts and necks -in- arched, nor perhaps Pacuvius himself Bombardo gladiofunhastaflammiloquentem.

 

Adjectives and adverbs have comparison. For each it is regular or irregular. Regular comparison is formed either by special signs, or by the formation of the comparative by the addition of er to the positive and of the superlative by the addition of est, as,hard, harder, hardest, {E} soft, softer, softest. And this form belongs exclusively to adjectives. The special signs by which comparison is indicated are, for quantity, mör, more, möst, most; for quality, beter, better, best, as, wiked, wicked, mör wiked, more wicked, möst wiked, most wicked; larned, learned, beter larned, better learned, best lerned, best learned. These very signs, however, have a certain irregularity of comparison as do those adjectives which follow: gud, good, beter, better, best; bad, il ,nauħt, evil, wurs, worse, wurst, worst; litl, little, les or leser, less or lesser, lëst, least; much, mör, möst, much more, most, (adjectivally) or adverbially, but indicating number mani, , möst, many, more, most. So also do far, farðer or furðer, farðest or furðest, distant, more distant, most distant, or far, farther, farthest; under, undermost; within or inward, iner, inner, inermost, innermost; without, outward, outer, outermost or utermost, uttermost; after, last; nër, nerer, next, near, nearer, next; and njħ, nerer, next, nigh, nearer, next. So also do litl, les, lest, little, less least; wel, beter, best, well, better, best; il, badlj, nauħtilj, badly, wurs, worse, wurst, worst; oft, ofter or oftner, oftnest or oftest, often, more often, most often; beför, before, former and formerlj, formerly; formöst or first, foremost or first; abuv, hjer, hjest, above, higher, on the highest point, for the adjective hjħ, hjer, hjest, has little irregularity; quikli, quickly, süner, sooner, sünest, soonest, for sün among the majority of people today has a connotation of early evening, though formerly it meant quickly. {n. p.}

Active verbals in ing are not compared by adding er and est as luving, loving; nor are the passives, as luved, loved, tauħt, taught; nor those made by adding abl, ful, les, ljk, as availabl, available, mjndful, mindful, faithles, faithless, söldierljk, soldierlike; nor those, too, which end in jv, ish, nd many which end in lj or us, as fvʒitjv, fugitive, grinish, greenish, dailj, daily, fämus, famous. In this class also place adjectives of material, as gôldn, golden, stöni, stony; also those which indicate time and rank together with many others, as wintrj, wintry, sekond, third, second, third, etc. And however much at one time you might hear stönier or famuser, still, in accordance with the license given speech, such speech will be tolerated rather than such writing praised. Nevertheless almost all these words which we have mentioned are compared by signs, as mör luving, möst luving; beter or best luved. And just as the Hebrews increase syllables in order to lend greater import to some word, so we increase the quantity of syllables, as grët, great, grëet, huge, monstrus, marvelous, mönstrus, exceedingly marvelous, möönstrus, so marvelous that it strikes man aghast. Sometimes the import is increased by doubling a word, as, an öld man, an old man, an öld öld man, one far advanced in years. And this last method occurs sometimes in writing; again, only in speech.

 The diminutives are few in number. There are some, however, in et, a s from käs, a case, kasket, a little case; some in el, as from pjk, a fresh-water wolf (pike), pikrel, a little pike; likewise some in kin, as from lam, a lamb, lamkin, a little lamb; others in ling, as from güs, a goose, gozling, a little goose, from kat, a cat, kitling, a little cat. In speech, a diminutive is occasionally formed by the additi on of the word tjni, a s a litl man, a man of short stature, a lïtl tjni man, a pigmy or dwarf. The formation of nicknames -- Ʒak for Jacob, Ʒon for Johannes {E2}, and Ʒil for Ʒilian Juliana, is of no concern because they belong to speech, not to writing, and although they may be assigned to the class of words indicating the small, still they are words whose final syllable has been dropped rather than diminutives.

 

Chapter X

Classification of Words

 

First the noun

            

   The    parts of speech are three

     

   
   

   

noun

     

   of    which the number is

     

   
   

   

singular

         

   verb

     

   plural

         

   consignificants,    which include the article, adverbs, prepositions

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   The    noun is

     

   commn

     

   
   

     

   substantive

         

   proper

     

   all    are

     

   or

         

   personal

     

   
   

     

   adjective

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

    

A substantive noun is common when the two articles a or ðe can be placed before it. A, as, a man; but an, before a vowel, as an oversïer, an overseer. This article

corresponds to the German ein, and to derivatives from unus of the French and other languages (not the numeral but merely praepositive), as, a hous, ein hausz, un maison, una casa, a house. Đe is used with both numbers and corresponds to the German article der, die, das, except that it has no inflection. The other types of nouns are deprived of these articles except as is shown in the discussion of syntax. {n. p.}

 

Irregularities in number

 

The following lack the singular: afairz, affairs; ashez, ashes; belöuz, bellows; daintiz, dainties; dregz, dregs; käts, eatables; shamblz, shambles; sherz, shears; sizerz, scissors; tongz, tongs; ëvz, eaves; richez, riches; öz, oose; hachez, hatches; bitson which the anchor rope is bound; shroudz, ratlingz and perhaps other tackling of a ship, thanks, nönz, jdz, kalendz, nones, ides, kalends, armz, arms; entralz and bouelz, intestines; barbz, barbs. Certain words peculiar to hawkers and to hunters are also lacking the singular, as krënz or kreanz, halters of the hawk or the chaffinch; ljnz however, belong to the long wings of hawks, such as the Smerillus and falcons; ʒesez, jesses; lesez, the excrements of a pig; fjants, of a fox; spraints, of an otter; so also floks, flocks; nvz, news; ʒiblets, the intestines and the feet of a goose; petitöz, the feet of a little pig (pettitoes); umblz, the intestines of a stag; dousets, testicles, and tender hors; trinkets, the tools of wine-cellars with which wine is poured from one utensil into another. The same is true of herbs: bïts, spinach; hops; avenz, avens; kaperz, capers; kresez, nasturtium (cresses); sanderz, sandalwood, etc., and of the numberals: , thrï, föur; two, three, four, etc.

 Names of cities, mountains, rivers, territories, months, and likewise of individual men lack a plural, as do the metals göld, gold; silver, bras, brass; tin, and the grains: whet, wheat; rj, rye; barlei, barley; rjs, rice; buk, buckmast; malt; but bën, bean; fich, chickpeas, are read in each number. Singulars have been made from these: bred, bread; äl, ale; potaʒ, broth; bier, beer; frumenti, the juice from wheat [frumenty]; chaf, chaff, and also gras, grass; hai, hay; the herbs, as fern, kumin, {E3} cumin; garlik, garlic; jzop, hyssop; purslain, purslane, etc.; and the compound names of herbs, as ei-brjħt, eye-bright; pen-irjal, pennyroyal; lädiz-mantl, lady’s mantle; sheperdz-purs, shepherd’s purse; hör-hound, hore-hound; ars-smart, smart-weed; liver-wurt, liver-wort, etc. Those which have been taken over from other languages remain unchanged, as filipendula, fumiterrae, palma-Kristi, brank-ursina, alkakengi, etc. Certain names of diseases also lack a plural: ðe ʒaundis, the jaundice; ðe hed-äch, the headache; ðe gout, the gout; ðe stön, the stone; ðe kolik, the colic; ðe timpanj, tympanitis, etc. This is true also of the humors, as koler, choler; blud, blood; flëm, phlegm; melankolj, melancholy, as well as of the arts, Grammar, Loʒik, Mvzik, Ʒeometrj. Likewise it is true of the liquids: huni, honey; sider, wine made of apples; milk, with the exception of water and wjn, wine, which share both numbers. Those substances which can be liquefied also follow this

form: buter, butter; glv, glue; grës, sëm, and fat, grease; pich, pitch, etc. To these add most of the disturbances of the mind: envi, envy; foli, folly; shäm, shame; merth, mirth, etc., and many which are wandering about without any abode, as aparel, apparel, also the cable of the sail by which it is held fast to the mast, bäkn, smoked pork; bâlm, balsam or melissa; bran, bumbast, the cotton-tree; châk, native lime; draf, draff; dros, slag; durt, dirt; dung; dust; flesh; foder, fodder; flax; froth; fud, food; hel, hell; hemp; insens or frankinsens, incense; kanvas, canvas; klai, clay; luk, luck; leðer, leather; ljm, lime; lëv, leave; marl, marl; mäs, mace; mjħt, might; mud; morter, mortar; muk, muck; musterd, mustard; nothing; Paradjs, Paradise; peper, pepper; plät, utensils of silver; quiet; relïf, relief; and very many more, as well as others ending in nes, {n. p.} as darknes, darkness; rjħteusnes, righteousness, etc. Also a very few ending in tj are read as plural, as komoditjz, commodities; privitjs, privities; almost all the rest in ti from Latin words ending in tas are singular, as pvritj, frvgalitj, erc. So also are a räs, a race, rest, quiet; rvth, ruth; sivet, civet; sljm, slime; suil, soil, filth, or water which a stag or horse agitates, süt, soot; strjf, strife; tar, liquid pitch; tinder, kindling-wood; timber; töu, the coarse part of flax; thrift; welth, wealth; wizdum, wisdom; wud, wood; wul, wool. There are several others which even in Latin are singular only: truth, faith; glöri, glory, etc. And although I would like to note here many others, sun; mun, moon; milk; trvs, truce; trust; offal, etc., still my temerity in speaking takes hold of me, and cries out that they should be left to the judgment of the people.

For most adjectives there is no difference in number except by grace of the noun which they modify, as, a gud man, a good man; gud men, good men. But much, everi, every, likewise all the ordinals such as first, sekond, second, third, are connected with singulars only; sundri, sundry, mani, many, al, all, both, with plurals only.

Certain words coming from one root have different meanings, as koper, copper, lëd, lead; butt a koper, a lëd, mean brewers' utensils made of those metals and have a plural; lëdz also is the lead roof of a building and is lacking a singular. Korn, the grain, is used only in the singular, but a korn a kernel, [has a plural] kornz, kernels; so also a flouer, a flower, flouerz, flowers, but flouers, flowers, a woman' s months, lacks the singular. Bïf, the flesh of cattle, mutn, of sheep, vël, of a calf, are read only in the singular, but a bïf, a cow; a mutn, a sheep; a vël, a calf, have bïvz, mutnz, {n. p.} vëlz. So yuth, youth, is only in the singular, but a yuth, a youth, has in the plural yuths, youths.

To a noun belong Gender, Case, Inflection. There are three genders: masculine, feminine, neuter . Masculine gender includes all males and whatever are known as masculine, as, angels, men, horses, male dogs, etc., the sun also and all the stars which are masculine in Latin, as Aties, Saturn, Arcturus, etc.

Feminine gender includes women and whatever are feminine--mares, cows, female dogs, the moon also, Venus, Virgo, Cassiopeia, etc. Moreover, by personification the winds are considered to be masculine; islands, provinces, cities, feminine. Rivers are partly masculine, as Isis, the Ouz, Abus, the Humber; partly feminine, as Tems, the Täm, Sabrina, the Severn, etc.

All inanimate objects are adjudged neuter.

There are six cases, which are not distinguished by their ending, but either by position or by the addition of signs. The nominative precedes the verb; the accusative follows; the sign of the genitive is of; of the dative, tu or for; of the ablative, one of the prepositions in, with, from etc., concerning which more later; the sign of the vocative is ô or ho, but is used rarely and for the sake of emphasis, as

 

 O man! remember ðat last biter thröu;

For az ðetri duth fâl, so ljz it ever löu.

 

Difference of declension is determined by the formation of the plural from the singular. Accordingly there are three declensions. The first is composed of those nouns whose stem vowel is changed in the plural, as, fut, feet; fït, feet; gus, goose; gïs, geese; man, men, as well as the compounds kinzman, {n. p.} kinsman; bondman, plural; pluraliter kinzmen, bondmen. Of you add these

 

                

   Kou

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Kjn

     

   cow,    kine

         

   Lous

     

   
   

     

   plurali

     

   
   

     

   Ljs

     

   louse,    lice

         

   Mous

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Mjs

     

   mouse,    mice

         

   Tüth

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Tïth

     

   tooth,    teeth

    

 

you have almost all the examples of this declension. There is, however, a double irregularity here; (1) an aberration when the word is altered more than is proper, as in wuman, woman, wimen, women, where both vowels are changed, as well as bruðer, brother; breðren or breðern, brethren; and (2) a lack when the form is the same in both numbers, as, shïp, singular sheep, or plural sheep, dïer, singular deer or plural deer; höz, singular hose, or plural hose; pëz, singular pease, or plural pease, odz, singular or plural odds, swjn, singular or plural swine; pïpl, singular or plural people, and perhaps others of those which we have said are irregular in number.

The second declension is composed of nouns which add s or z to the singular from the plural, as

 

                               

    ship

       

    ship

       

    
    

       

    Plural

       

    
    

       

    ships

       

    ships

             

    bük

       

    book

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    büks

       

    books

             

    thing

       

    thing

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    thingz

       

    things

             

    

       

    sea

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    sëz

       

    seas

             

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

        

And here, too, there is a twofold irregularity. One is of nouns ending in f, which commonly before z change the f to v in the plural, as wjf, wife, ljf, life, lëf, leaf; bïf, beef, plural wjvz, ljvz, lëvz, bïvz The other great irregularity occurs when a plural word is employed indiscriminately with the singular, as muni or muniz, money or moneys. In this connection consider some names of herbs, as mint or mints, alexander or alexanderz, alexander, brambl or bramblz, bramble, malöu or malöuz, mallow, etc. {F} Peni a penny, plural peniz, and by syncope, pens, is also irregular.

The third declension is composed of nouns of unequal syllables, whose plural exceeds the singular by one syllable.

 

Exempla

 

                                     

    singular

       

    
    

       

    a     glas

       

    a     glass

       

    
    

       

    plural

       

    
    

       

    glasez

       

    glasses

             

    
    

       

    a     kis

       

    a     kiss

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    kisez

       

    kisses

             

    
    

       

    a     witnes

       

    a     witness

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    witnesez

       

    witnesses

             

    
    

       

    a     kountes

       

    a     countess

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    kountesez

       

    countesses

             

    but     singular

       

    
    

       

    ox

       

    ox

       

    
    

       

    plural

       

    
    

       

    oxn

       

    oxen

             

    
    

       

    chjld

       

    child

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    children

       

    children

        

 

have a certain irregularity. Thus those whose ending in the singular is s change in the plural to z, as hous, house, houzez, houses.

Notice first that all nouns, of whatever declension, vary in one form only; i.e. that when the nominative, accusative, or vocative of each number has been given, the rest of the cases are recognized by their own signs, as

 

                               

    Nom.

       

    ðe     witnes

       

    testis

       

    pluraliter

       

    
    

       

    ðe     witnesez

       

    testes

             

    Accus.

       

    testem

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    Voc.

       

    ô     witnes

       

    o     testis

       

    
    

       

    ô     witnesez

       

    o     testes

             

    Gen.

       

    of     ðe witnes

       

    testis

       

    
    

       

    of     ðe     witnesez

       

    testium

             

    Dat.

       

    tu     ðe witnes

       

    testi

       

    
    

       

    tu     ðe     witnesez

       

    testibus

             

    Abl.

       

    with     ðe witnes

       

    cum     teste

       

    
    

       

    with     ðe     witnesez

       

    cum     testibus

        

Notice second that proper nouns, whenever they have a plural, are of the second declension, or of the third if they end in s, sh, or in a double consonant such as x, z, ch, or ʒ, as for instance Gil, Gilz, secon declension, and third declension; Talbois, Talboisez; Finsh, Finshez; D’eureux, D’eureuxez; ʒjlz, ʒjlzez; Zouch, Zouchez; Stranʒ, {n. p.} Stranʒez. The nominative of proper nouns taken from other languages remains everywhere unchanged, as nominative Ʒvlius Sezar oppresed his kuntri, Julius Caesar oppressed his country; Gen., Đe prjd of ʒvlius Sezar, the pride of Julius Caesar. sent leterz tu ʒvlius Sezar, he sent letters to Julius Caesar, etc. However, make an exception of the genitive of possession, as Sizeröz eloquens profited ðe kommon-welth mör ðen Sezarz valor, Cicero's eloquence profited the common-wealth more than Caesar' s valor.

An Examination of the Genitive

The genitive of each number can be formed by adding s or z, as ðe ships takling, the ship’s tackle; menz manerz, men’s manners. Thus it comes about that the genitive singular in the second and third declension is often identical with the plural, as ðis bükz levz, this book’s leaves; ðe witnesez kredit the witness's credit or the witnesses' credit. Irregular nouns also follow the given rule as far as can be done, as ðe dierz attier, the deer’s horns; ljfs shortnes, life’s shortness; an oxen yök, an ox’s yoke, ðe housez furnitvr, the house’s furniture.

 

Chapter XI

Personal Nouns

 

There are three personal nouns: of the first person J, I; of the second đou, thou; of the third hï, he. They are inflected thus: {F2}

 

                          

   singular

     

   
   

     

   Nom.

     

   I

     

   I

     

   
   

     

   pluraliter

     

   
   

     

   Nom.

     

   

     

   we

         

   
   

     

   Acc.

     

   

     

   me

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Acc.

     

   us

     

   us

         

   
   

     

   Gen.

     

   of    mï

     

   of    me

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Gen.

     

   of    us

     

   of    us

         

   
   

     

   Dat.

     

   tu    mï

     

   to    me

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Dat.

     

   tu    us

     

   to    us

         

   
   

     

   Abl.

     

   from    mï

     

   a    me

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Abl.

     

   from    us

     

   a    nobis

    

 

 

 

                          

   singulariter

   

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

   


   

   

Nom.

     

   
   

   


   

   

đou

     

   
   

   


   

   

thou

     

   
   

   

   
   

     

   pluraliter

     

   
   

     

   
   

   


   

   

Nom.

     

   
   

   


   

   

yi or    (1) you

     

   
   

   


   

   

you

         

   
   

     

   Voc.

     

   ô ðou

     

   ô thou

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Voc.

     

   ô yï or    you

     

   ô you

         

   
   

     

   Acc.

     

   ðï

     

   thee

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Acc.

     

   you

     

   you

         

   
   

     

   Gen.

     

   of ðï

     

   of thee

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Gen.

     

   of you

     

   of you

         

   
   

     

   Dat.

     

   tu ðï

     

   to thee

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Dat.

     

   tu you

     

   to you

         

   
   

     

   Abl.

     

   from ðï

     

   from thee

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   Abl.

     

   from you

     

   from you

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

        

   
   

   


   

   

singular

     

   
   

   

Nom.    (2) ,    shï,    it;    he, she, it

         

   Acc.    him,    her,    it;    him, her, it

         

   Gen.    of,    dat. tu,    abl. from    him,    her,    it,

         

   
   

   

plural

     

   Nom.    ðëi    aut ðäi,    illi, illae, illa.

         

   acc.    ðem,    illos, illas, illa.

         

   gen.    of,    dat. tu,    abl. from    ðem.

    

 

 

 

The relatives and interrogatives are whü, which, and what, and correspond to Latin qui, quis, quae, quid, quod, singular and plural, masculine and feminine:

 

        

   Nom.

     

   whü,    qui,    quis, quae

         

   Acc.

     

   whüm,    quem, quam

         

   Gen.

     

   of    whüm,    aut whüz cuius

         

   Dat.

     

   tu    whüm,    cui

         

   Abl.

     

   from    whüm,    a quo, qua

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

Which is both numbers, also all genders, and all cases.

What is also differentiated only by signs and for the most part is an interrogative {n. p.} unless it is compounded, as sumwhat, somewhat; whatsoeuer; or in a shortened form, as Let us häv what to ët for sumwhat, Let us have something which we may eat. ðis this, masculine, feminine, neuter, and ðat, that, masculine, feminine, neuter, are the singular demonstratives; ðëz, these, masculine, feminine, neuter, and ðöz, those, masculine, feminine, neuter, are the plural demonstratives and are differentiated by the signs of the cases. But ðat, used as a relative shares both numbers and in the nominative and accusative is used in the same capacity as whü and which, as,

 

          

   Qui    non po

     

   test

     

   se    continere

         

   ssunt

    

 

 

Can be rendered thus

 

 

            

   

   

ðёi

     

   whü

     

   kannot    kontain

     

   himself

         

   which

     

   
   

         

   ðat

     

   ðemselvz

    

 

And likewise

 

                                            

     Ego      ill

         

     um

         

     accuso,      qu

         

     em

         

     scio      affine

         

     m

         

     esse      culpae.

                 

     es

         

     os

         

     s

             

 

                                

     
     

         

     him

         

     whüm

         

     I      knöu tu bï gilti.

                 

     I      akkvz

         

     
     

         

     which

                 

     
     

         

     ðem

         

     ðat

             

 

Säm, same, masculine, feminine, neuter, unchanging in each number, and self, masculine, feminine, neuter, in the singular, but in the plural selvz, masculine, feminine, neuter, are appropriative and, like common adjectives, indeclinable. If you add to these alön, alone; ani, any; oðer, other; wheðer, whether; ëiðer, either; nëiðer, neither; sum, some, masculine, feminine, neuter (because they indicate neither quantity nor quality, etc., but person as far as is possible), you have all which can be counted as primitives in this class. Following are the seven derivatives: from (3), mjn, masculine, feminine, neuter; from us, ourz, masculine, feminine, neuter; from ðï, ðjn, masculine, feminine, neuter; from yv, yvrz, masculine, feminine, neuter; from hï, (4) hiz, from her, herz, from ðëi, ðëirz, masculine, feminine, neuter, which, according to the fashion of common adjectives have no inflection.

1. Notice first that you is customarily written thus and so pronounced by some; but by the majority. Nevertheless, since this does not yet obtain everywhere, it will be left undetermined for a while. Yï, also, in the plural is pronounced by the heralds as ô yïz, meaning ô you, one and all.

2. , shï, it: However much this difference in gender may exist in the third person, still the forms are all substantive, and although they are sometimes used relatively, they are nevertheless never used adjectively.

3. The possessives mjn and ðjn commonly precede vowels: mj and ðj, consonants, a mjn ei, mine eye; ðj klök, thy cloak; mj wjf, my wife; ðjn unkl, thine uncle.

4. Hiz remains the same at all times; the others lose z if they precede a substantive, as, her girdl, the girdle of that woman, our hous, our house, your servant, your servant, ðeir richez, their riches However, if the substantive should precede, then z buzzes at the end, as, đis bvk iz hirz, ourz, yürz, ðeirz. So also [if the substantive preceded, the form is] mjn and ðjn.

 

Chapter XII

The verb

 

Certain verbs are personal; certain, impersonal. There are three kinds of personal verbs: active, passive, and neuter. Conjugation is characteristic of the verb. Moreover, conjugation is the changing of the verb form to indicate the moods, tenses, and the persons of each number.

There are four moods as in the Latin: indicative, imperative, potential, and infinitive. In like manner the tenses are five in number: present, future, imperfect, perfect, and indefinite. Active and neuter verbs have three conjugations. These are distinguished by differences in the form of the present, imperfect, and perfect indicative. The present also is identical with the present infinitive, which is properly the stem and the base of all forms derived therefrom, because it has meaning without regard to time or person, as tu luv to love, tu tëch, to teach.

Prima coniugatio est verborum, quae figurativam sive characteristicam thematis non mutant. Est autem figurativa, vocalis aut diphthongus ultima dictionis, ut J luv, amo; J luved, amabam; J hav luved, amavi. J rest, quiesco; J rested, quiescebam; J hav rested, quievi. J öpn, aperio; J öpned, aperiebam; J hav öpned, aperui. Neque unquam ultra haec tempora, figurativa thematis variatur; et ideo nec plures esse possunt coniugationes, nec pauciores quam tres.

Ad hanc coniugationem afferuntur omnia fere derivata, et nostratia, et peregrina. Et quum omne fere nomen commune vere nostrum, sive substantivum sit, sive adiectivum, in verbum aliquod efflorescat; facile est coniicere quam immensa est verborum seges quae hiic reconditur, ut a wurship, dignitas, tu wurship, colo; a klök, pallium, tu klök, palliare; a fish, piscis, tu fish, piscari; sic ab hous, domus, bed, lectus, börd, mensa, tu houz, tu bed, tu börd, tecto, lecto, mensa recipere. Nonnullis tamen figurativa litera mutatur, ut a flour, flos, tu flour, floreo, et tu flurish, activum flores fingere, et neutrum floreo; sic a frost, gelu, tu frïz, congelo; à göld, aurum, tu gild, inauro; a fal, casus, tu fel, deiicio. Sic et ab adiectivis enascuntur verba, ut a short, brevis, tu shortn, abbreviare; ab hard, durus, tu hardn, indurare. Quaedam etiam ex [n. p.] his enata aliquantulum deflectunt, ut a ful, tu fil, impleo. At a wurk, opus, I wurk, operor, I wröuħt, operabar, est coniugationis secundae.

Huc etiam collige omnia illa quorum characteristica est diphtongus propria, aut ü, ut tu wait, attendere; tu tüil, laborare; tu sound, sono; tu müv, moveo, etc.

A latinis etiam nata fere omnia huc referuntur, ut tu konsider, considero; tu defend, tu derjv, tu subskrjb, tu silens, tu konsort; et quae a supini nata diximus; tu supöz, tu insens, etc. Est autem in hac coniugatione anomalia triplex. Prima, eorum quae figurativam natura longam corripiunt in imperfecto, et inde natis, ut J swët, sudo, J swet, sudabam; J rëd, lego, J red, legebam; J bjt, mordeo, J bit, mordebam, J häv bitn, momordi, etc.

Secunda, eorum quae consonam figurativae adiunctam mutant: et maxime v in f; quia sunt invicem commutabiles, ut J lëv, linquo, J left, linquebam; J bërev, aufero, J bereft, auferebam. Huc adde quaedam in nd, ut J send, mitto; J sent, mittebam; J spend, consumo, J spent, consumebam; sic J lend, mutuo do; J bend, flecto; J rend, lacero, et a kem (pro köm, como), J kemt, comebam, uti etiam alia in p, x, sh, ut tu dip, tingo; tu fix, figo; tu wish, opto; Imperfectum J dipt, fixt, wïsht.

Tertia anomalia est penitus immobilium, ut J kast, iacio aut iaciebam, J hav kast, ieci; J kut, scindo aut scindebam, J hav kut, scidi; J knit, necto vel nectebam, J hav knit, nexui; J set, loco aut pono, ponebam, posui; sic J put, pono; J shut, claudo; I hit, ferio; I hurt, ledo; I bët, verbero; I spit, spuo: nam I bet, verberabam; I spat, spuebam, sunt dialecti.

Secunda est verborum quae figurativam praesentis mutant in imperfecto, ut I kum, venio, I kam, [n, p.] veniebam, J häv kum, veni; J run, curro, J ran, currebam, J häv run, cucurri; J giv, do, J gäv, dabam, J häv givn, dedi. In his vides figurativam praesentis et perfecti eandem. Aliquando perfectum idem est cum imperfecto, ut I stand, I stüd, J häv stüd, sto, stabam, steti; I think, puto, I thöuħt, putabam, J häv thöuħt, putavi; J wurk, laboro, J wröuħt, laborabam, J häv wröuħt, laboravi; J tëch, doceo, J tauħt, docebam, J häv tauħt, docui, etc. Et quamvis consona praesentis saepe in hac forma mutetur; tamen quia saepe, anomaliam nullam esse censebimus. Est tamen anomalia eorum quae in perfecto utramque figurativam assumunt: et praesentis videlicet, et imperfecti, ut I höld, teneo, J held, tenebam, J häv held aut J häv höldn, tenui. Anomaliam verbi tu go, post defectiva vide.

Observandum, quaedam esse verba coniugationis primae, quae ratione dialecti sunt etiam secundae, ut I wrjt, scribo, J writ, scribebam, J häv writn, scripsi est coniugationis primae; at I wrjt, imperfectum commune I wröt, et boreale J wrät, secundae. Sic I drjv, J driv, J häv drivn, impello, primae; at I drjv, I dröv aut I dräv, I häv drivn, secundae. Sedulo autem cauendum est, ne locum dialectis concedas praeterquam communi; aut (quod supra monui) inter poetas boreali: nam nullum ferme verbum est, quod pro aurium sordibus non deformant. Ut tu lauħ, rideo, si ipsis placet est tu laf; et pro imperfecto I lauħed, audies I lüħ aut ai lvħ, ridebam. I kljm, I kljmd, J häv kljmd, scando, est regulare primae: apud rusticos autem, pro imperfecto habes I klöm, I kläm, I klum, scandebam.

Tertia coniugatio est verborum quae characteristicam praesentis mutant et in imperfecto et perfecto, ut I spëk, loquor, J späk, loquebar, J häv spökn, loquutus sum; I [G] , facio, I did, I hav dun. I swim, nato, I swam, natabam, I hav swum, natavi. Sunt et hic fere omnia cum secunda coniugatione communia; idque non ex linguae nostraae proprietate, sed usu potius omnia audente, ut I swër, J swör, J hav swörn, iuro, est secundae; at I swër, I swär, I hav swörn tertiae. Sic etiam in sequentibus idem fit, ut

 

                         

    Praesens

       

    
    

       

    Imperfectum

       

    Perfectum

       

    
    

             

    3

       

    
    

       

    bär

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    I     bër

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    hav     born

       

    fero

             

    2

       

    
    

       

    bör

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    
    

    


    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    Praesens

       

    
    

       

    Imperfectum

       

    Perfectum

       

    
    

             

    3

       

    
    

       

    drank

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    I     drink

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    J     hav drunk

    

drunkn

       

    paragogice

    

bibo

             

    2

       

    
    

       

    drunk

       

    
    

             

    
    

       

    
    

    


    

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    Praesens

       

    
    

       

    Imperfectum

       

    Perfectum

       

    
    

             

    3

       

    
    

       

    wär

       

    
    

       

    
    

             

    I     wër

       

    
    

       

    
    

       

    J     hav worn

       

    tero,     itemque in reliquis

             

    2

       

    
    

       

    wör

       

    
    

       

    
    

        

 

To klëv, findere, unicum est (quod memini) commune primae cum tertia coniugatione, ut I klëv, I kleft, I hav kleft; et I klëv, I kläv, I hav klövn.

Est et in hac coniugatione quaedam figurativae luxuries, ut

 

 

            

   
   

     

   flv

     

   
   

     

   fled

         

   I    flj

     

   
   

     

   hav

     

   
   

         

   
   

     

   fled

     

   
   

     

   flöun

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   Volo,    volabam, volavi.    [n. p.]

    

 

 

                                    

     
     

         

     sträk

         

     I      hav

         

     strikn

     

struk

     

strukn

         

     et      per paragogen

                 

     I      strjk,      I

         

     strik

                 

     ferio

         

     strök

                 

     
     

         

     struk

             

 

                            

     
     

         

     bräk

         

     I      hav brökn

                 

     I      brëk, I      

         

     brök

                 

     frango

         

     olim      brast

                 

     
     

         

     occidentaliter      brïk

             

 

 

Quaedam ambigua, fiunt quadantenus inflexu uniuoca, ut

 

                                        

     
     

         

     sero

         

     
     

         

     serebam

         

     
     

         

     söun,      sevi

                 

     I      söu

         

     
     

         

     I      söud

         

     
     

         

     I      hav

         

     
     

                 

     
     

         

     suo

         

     
     

         

     suebam

         

     
     

         

     söud,      sui

             

 

                                        

     
     

         

     iacio

         

     
     

         

     lai,      iacebam

         

     
     

         

     ljn,      iacui

                 

     I      lj

         

     
     

         

     I

         

     
     

         

     I      hav

         

     
     

                 

     
     

         

     mentior

         

     
     

         

     lj’d,      mentiebar

         

     
     

         

     lj’d,      mentitus sum

             

 

Compositio nonnumquam mutat coniugationem, ut J häv, habeo, J had, habebam, est secundae; at tu bihäv, se gerere, est coniugationis primae.

Et quum maxima linguae anglicae difficultas in nominum declinatione et verborum coniugatione sita sit; quas quidem ego primus mortalium, adeo explicate indicavi, ut nihil lucis, nihil facilitatis afferri possit: spero equidem lexicographos, houlettos, barettos, rideros, minshaeos, caeteros, nullum dictionarium anglico-latinum in vulgus elaturos, quo exterorum hominum studia promovere velint, in quo ista sedulo non indicentur. In prima nominum declinatione adnotetur numerus pluralis, ut a mous, mus, pluraliter mjs; in aliis, satis sit dixisse declinationis secundae aut tertiae. In verbis etiam, si vox sit coniugationis seundae aut tertiae inflectatur, ut tu täk, capio, J tük, J hav täkn, coniugationis secundae; J forget, obliviscor, J forgat aut forgot, J hav forgotn, coniugationis tertiae. In prima satis sit illud significasse, nisi aliquam habeat anomaliam. Id ipsum edicerem de comparatione irregulari, nisi existimarem me illam satis edocuisse. [G 2]

 

Formatio temporum in activis et neutris

 

Infinitivi praesens est thema et fundamentum caeterorum, ut tu paint, pingere.

Praesens indicativi formatur ab infinitivo, abiecto signo infiniti tu et apponendo personam primam singularem, ut I paint, pingo. Unicum tu bï, esse, facit I am, sum.

Futurum formatur a praesenti, per signa shal aut wil in indicativo; shal in imperativo; herafter, in potentiali, et infinitivo.

Imperfectum formatur a praesenti; servata, aut mutata figurativa in singulis coniugationibus, ut supra dictum est.

Perfectum et indefinitum, eadem sunt cum adiectivo verbali passivo: et inde fiunt per signa apposita, häv, perfecto, et had, indefinito.

Indefinitum plerumque rem infectam significat, nisi interrogative, aut post adverbium usurpetur: deficit etiam in omnibus modis post indicativum: in aliis modis, si usus venit, utimur indefinito indicativo, aut etiam perfecto potentiali, aut infinitivo, ut legissem quidem si animadvertissem, I miħt häv red it indïd, if I had mjnded it.

Verborum variatio facillima est. Aut enim per signa fit, aut per terminationes. Terminationes sunt in secunda praesentis indicativi est in tertia eth. Secunda item persona imperfecti fit a prima addito st, aut est. Sic omnis terminationum differentia in singulari tantum numero reperitur. Numerus enim pluralis in omni persona idem est cum prima persona singulari. Atquae praeter [n. p.] illa in ing, et er: plures a verbo terminationes non sunt.

At quamvis in personarum et numerorum formis, tanta terminationum varietas non sit apud nos, quanta in aliis linguis; per signa tamen, ut in nominibus, sic et in verbis, omnia animi sensu affatim depromimus.

Sunt autem signa partim personae, de quibus supra, partim ipsa verba anomala, aut defectiva. Anomalorum princeps est verbum substantivum tu bï, esse: quod tamen quia per signa inflectitur, signa ipsa imprimis variabimus. Signa sunt temporum et modorum. Temporum shal, wil, häv, had, , did. Shal latino verbo possit, futurus aut debebo; et sic inflectitur;

 

 

                

   futurum

     

   indicativum

     

   debebo,    debebis

     

   

   

   

   

ðei

     

   
   

     

   debebit

   

debebimus

   

debebitis

   

debebunt

         

   et

     

   
   

     

   shal

         

   imperativum

     

   J    shal,    ðou    shalt

     

   
   

    

 

 

 

 

 

Potentialis modi

 

                                    

     imperfectum

         

     deberem,      deberes

         

     

     

     

     

ðei

         

     
     

     

debere

     

shüld

         

     t

     

mus

     

tis

     

nt

                 

     
     

                 

     J      shüld,      ðou      shüldest

             

 

Caetera deficit

 

Shüldest per syncompam shüld’st; quae quidem non in signis tantum, sed in omnibus etiam verbis activis et neutris locum habet; in secunda (inquam) singulari sic terminata; usque adeo ut in aliquibus, vox syncopata duntaxat in usu sit, ut ðou luvedst, non luvedest; ðou [G 3] mai’st, non maiest. Forma defectivi I wil.

 

Indicativi futurum

 

              

   volam voles volet

   

J    wilðou    wilt     hï    wil

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   
   

     

   volemus

         

   

     

   wil

     

   voletis

         

   ðei

     

   
   

     

   volent

         

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

     

   
   

    

 

 

 

Potentialis imperfectum

 

              

   vellem velles  vellet

   

I    wüld ðou wuld’st     hï wüld

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   velle

   

wüld

     

   mus

         

   

     

   tis

         

   ðei

     

   nt

    

 

 

 

 

Si wil significet iubeo, actiuum est; regulare coniugationis primae, ut I wil, ðou wilest, hï wileth, iubeo, iubes, iubet; I wiled, iubebam, ðou wiledst, iubebas, etc., ad exemplum verbi tu luv, ut post sequitur.

 

Forma signi v

 

                                      

      iIndicativus

           

      perfectum

           

      I       hav,       ðou       hast,       hï       hath,       ,       ,       ðeï       hav.

                     

      indefenitum

           

      I       had,       ðou       hadst,       hï       had,       ,       ,       ðeï       had.

                   

 

Et licet haec mere signa videantur, potius quam desumpta a verbo perfecto I hav, habeo, I had, habebam, I hav had, habui; possunt tamen ubique verti per habeo, ut I hav loved her; ad verbum habeo illam amatam; ad sensum nostrum, habui illam amatam, aut illam in amore habui: sic I had thöuħt, si verbum verbo reddas, habebam putatum, apud nos est, in animo habueram.

Supersunt adhuc signorum tempora duo: et did omnis omnino verbi praesenti activo, et imperfecto annexa, si signa excipias et anomalum tu bï. Sed quum verbum rem simpliciter fieri significet; haec actionis circumstantiam, vehementiam, tarditatem, et similia declarant, [n. p.]ut I tёch, doceo, I dü tёch, i.e. in docendo totus occupatus sum; I ran, currebam; I did run, i.e. sedulo, fortasse coactus, aut ita ut non ambularem. Et quia in hac loquendi formula intellectio quaedam est, proinde haec signa his temporibus saepenumero desunt.

Observa figurativam praesentis, semper manere in imperfecto formato per did, idque in omni coniugatione, ut ab I think, cogito, I thöuħt aut I did think, cogitabam, coniugationis secundae. I forget, obliviscor; I forgat aut I did forget, tertiae. Sequitur forma inflexionis.

 

                                                     

      indicativus       praesens

           

      ago,       agis,  agit

           

      pluraliter

           

      

      

      

ðei

           

      ag

      

           

      imus

                     

      I       dü,       ðou       düst, hï       düth

           

      itis

                     

      
      

           

      unt

                   

 

                                                     

      Imperfecum

           

      agebam,       agebas,  agebat

           

      pluraliter

           

      

      

      

ðei

           

      ageba

      

did

           

      mus

                     

      I       did,        ðou       didst,        hï       did

           

      tis

                     

      
      

           

      nt

                   

 

De signis modorum

 

Indicativus signis caret, sed rem aperte esse, aut non esse; fieri, aut non fieri significat.

Imperativi signa sunt in praesenti let sine aut fac; in futuro shal.

Potentialis signa mai, mjħt, kan, küld, shüld, etiam et wüld. Infinitivi tu.

 

 

              

   potentialis    praesens

     

   liceat    aut possim,    possim

   

I    mai,     ðou    maist

     

   

     

   possi

   

mai

     

   t

         

   

     

   mus

         

   

     

   tis

         

   ðei

     

   nt    [n. p.]

    

 

 

 

 

Potentialis

 

              

   imperfectum

     

   possem,    posses

   

J    mjħt,    ðou    mjħt’st

     

   

     

   posse

   

mjħt

     

   t

         

   

     

   mus

         

   

     

   tis

         

   ðei

     

   nt

    

 

 

 

 

                  

   praesens

     

   J    kan

     

   possim

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   possi

   

kan

     

   mus

         

   ðou    kanst

     

   possis

     

   

     

   tis

         

   hï    kan

     

   possit

     

   ðei

     

   nt

    

 

 

 

 

                

   imperfectum

     

   J    küld

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   ðou    küldst

     

   

     

   küld

     

   possem

         

   hï    küld

     

   ðei

     

   
   

     

   
   

    

 

 

 

Haec de signis: sequitur anomalum tu .

 

Indicativi

 

 

                  

   praesens

     

   J    am

     

   sum

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   
   

     

   sumus

         

   ðou    art

     

   es

     

   

     

   är

     

   estis

         

   hï    is

     

   est

     

   ðei

     

   
   

     

   sunt

    

 

 

 

                  

   Futurus

     

   J    shal

     

   

     

   ero

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   
   

         

   ðou    shalt

     

   eris

     

   

     

   shal    bï

         

   hï    shal

     

   erit

     

   ðei

     

   
   

    

 

                                                                         

       Imperfectus

             

       J        waz

             

       eram

             

       pluraliter

             

       

             

       
       

             

       eramus

                         

       ðou        wast

             

       eras

             

       

             

       wёr

             

       eratis

                         

       hï        waz

             

       erat

             

       ðei

             

       
       

             

       erant

                          

 

                                                                                         

        perfectus

               

        J         hav

               

        bïn

               

        fui

               

        pluraliter

               

        

               

        
        

                             

        ðou         hast

               

        fuisti

               

        

               

        hav         bïn         [n. p.]

                             

        hï         hath

               

        fuit

               

        ðei

               

        
        

                                  

 

                  

   indefinitus

     

   J    had

     

   bïn

     

   fueram

     

   pluraliter

     

   

     

   
   

         

   ðou    hadst

     

   fueras

     

   

     

   had    bïn

         

   hï    had

     

   fuerat

     

   ðei

     

   
   

    

 

 

 

 

Imperativi

 

                                                                                                  

         praesens

                 

         let          mï bï

                 

         sim

                 

         pluraliter

                 

         let          us bï

                 

         simus

                                 

         bï          ðou

                 

         sis,          es

                 

         bï          yï

                 

         este

                                 

         let          hïm

                 

         sit

                 

         let          ðei bï

                 

         sint

                                           

 

                                                                                                          

         futurum

                 

         đou          shalt bï          

                 

         esto

                 

         pluraliter

                 

         

                 

         
         

                 

         estote

                                 

         
         

                 

         
         

                 

         
         

                 

         shal          bï

                 

         
         

                                 

         hï          shal bï

                 

         esto

                 

         ðei

                 

         
         

                 

         sunto

                                           

 

Potentialis

 

 

 

                                                                                                          

         praesens

                 

         J          mai bï

                 

         sim

                 

         pluraliter

                 

         

                 

         
         

                 

         simus

                                 

         ðou          maist          bï

                 

         sis

                 

         

                 

         mai          bï

                 

         sitis

                                 

         hï          mai bï

                 

         sit

                 

         ðei

                 

         
         

                 

         sint

         


         

                                           

Futurum idem est perpetuo cum praesenti, addito singulis personis hёrafter, posthac, ut J mai bï hёrafter, sim posthac aut fuero; ðou maist bï hёrafter, fueris, etc.

 

                                                                                  

         imperfectum

                 

         J          mjħt

                 

         

                 

         essem

                                 

         ðou          mjħtst

                 

         esses

                                 

         hï          mjħt

                 

         esset

                                           

 

                                                                                  

         pluraliter

                 

         

                 

         mjħt          bï

                 

         essemus

                                 

         

                 

         essetis

                                 

         ðei

                 

         essent

                                           

 

                                                                                  

         perfectum

                 

         J          mjħt

                 

         hav          bïn

                 

         fuerim

                                 

         ðou          mjħtst

                 

         fueris

                                 

         hï          mjħt

                 

         fuerit          [H]

                                           

 

                                                                                  

         pluraliter

                 

         

                 

         mjħt          hav          bïn

                 

         fuerimus

                                 

         

                 

         fueritis

                                 

         ðei

                 

         fuerint

                                           

 

Infinitivi

 

Praesens tu bï, esse; futurum tu bï hёrafter, fore; perfectum, tu hav bïn, fuisse; participium praesens, bïing, ens.

Haec de signis sequuntur:

 

Paradigmata verborum perfectorum activorum, et neutrorum, in tribus coniugationibus.

 

Modi indicativi

                                                                                                          

         tempus          praesens

                 

         J

                 

         luv           amo

                 

         ðou                    

                 

         luvest           amas

                 

         

                 

         luveth

                                 

         tёch doceo

                 

         tёchest doces

                 

         tёcheth

                                 

         spёk dico

                 

         spёkest dicis

                 

         spёketh

                                 

         
         

                 

         
         

                 

         amat,          docet, dicit aut loquitur

                 

         
         

                 

         
         

                                           

 

                                                                                                                                     

          pluraliter

                   

          

                   

          luv            amamus

                   

          yï                      

                   

          luv            amatis

                   

          ðei

                   

          luv

                                     

          tёch docemus

                   

          tёch docetis

                   

          tёch

                                     

          spёk dicimus

                   

          spёk dicitis

                   

          spёk

                                     

          
          

                   

          
          

                   

          amant,           docent, loquuntur

                   

          
          

                   

          
          

                                                     

Notiones

 

1. Secunda persona singularis patitur syncopam, ut ðou luv’st, spёk’st. Syncopae autem nullus locus est in verbis exeuntibus in s, sh, aut duplici consonante x, z, ch, ʒ, ut ðou pasest, praeteris; ðou washest, lavas; ðou waxest, crescis; ðou touzest, susque deque versas; ðou tёchest, doces; ðou chanʒest, mutas; non ðou past, ðou washst, etc. [n. p.]

2. Tertia etiam persona apocopatur per s or z, ut hï luvz, hï spёks. In terminationibus antem supradictis e non abiicitur, sed th migrat in z, ut tёchez, chanʒez. Hinc excipe anomala hav, hast, hath, did, de quibus ante.

 

 

                                                                                                

        futurum

               

        J         shal

               

        luv

               

        ðou         shalt

               

        luv

               

                 shal

               

        luv

               

        amabo

                             

        aut

               

        tёch

               

        aut

               

        tёch

               

        aut

               

        tёch

               

        docebo

                             

        wil

               

        spёk

               

        wilt

               

        spёk

               

        wil

               

        spёk

               

        dicam

                             

        pluraliter

               

        ,         ,         ðei         shal         aut wil         luv,         tёch,         spёk

                                  

 

Vox futuri nihil mutat et semper eadem est cum prima praesentis.

                                                                                                                  

         imperfectum

                 

         J

                 

         luved           

                 

         ðou

                 

         luvedst           

                 

         

         

         

         

ðei

                 

         luved

                 

         amabam

                                 

         tauħt 

                 

         tauħest 

                 

         tauħt

                 

         docebam

                                 

         späk 

                 

         späkest 

                 

         späk

                 

         loquebar

                                           

Secunda tantum singularis differt a ceteris per est aut e elisa, per st, ut ðou tauħ’st, ðou sspäk’st.

                                                                                                          

         Perfectum

         

         J          hav

                 

         luved           

                 

         ðou          hast

                 

         luved           

                 

         hï          hath

         

         
         

                 

         luved           

                 

         amavi

                                 

         tauħt 

                 

         tauħt 

                 

         tauħt 

                 

         docui

                                 

         spökn 

                 

         spökn 

                 

         spökn 

                 

         dixi

                                 

         pluraliter

                 

         ,          ,          ðei          häv          luved,          tauħt,          spökn

                                           

 

                                                                                                                                              

          indefinitum

                   

          J           had

                   

          luved            

                   

          ðou           hadst

                   

          

          

          

          

ðei

                   

          had

                   

          luved

                   

          amav

                   

          eram.

                                     

          tauħt 

                   

          tauħt

                   

          docu

                                     

          spökn 

                   

          späk

                   

          dix

                                                     

 

Licet haec duo tempora ab adiectivo verbali passivo formentur, per signa hav et had: observandum tamen in [H 2] illis verbalibus quae in n, impurum desiunt, illud n, in his temporibus aliquando negligi, quod in adiectivo negligendum non est, ut J hav aut had spök tu him, dixeram illi; non autem it is spök abröd, sed spökn emanavit in vulgus. Nec licet scribere it is writ, sed writn, scriptum est: quamvis dicas J hav writ tu him, scripsi ad eum. Dixi aliquando, quia aliquando audias utrumque, J hav brök, fregi, et it is brök, fractum est, aut utrobique brökn.

Datur quidem haec sermoni venia, quia id sibi assumit, ut usurpet J hav spök, writ, brök, sed nemo disertus ita scribat.

 

Modi imperativi

                                                                                                                  

         tempus          praesens

                 

         let          mï

                 

         luv           amem

                 

         luv

                 

         ðou

                 

         ama

                 

         let          him

                 

         luv           amet

                                 

         tёch doceam

                 

         tёch

                 

         doce

                 

         tёch doceat

                                 

         spёk dicam

                 

         spёk

                 

         dic

                 

         spёk dicat

                                           

 

                                                                                                                  

         pluraliter

                 

         let          us

                 

         luv           amemus

                 

         luv

                 

         

                 

         amate

                 

         let          ðem

                 

         luv           ament

                                 

         tёch doceamus

                 

         tёch

                 

         docete

                 

         tёch doceant

                                 

         spёk dicamus

                 

         spёk

                 

         dicite

                 

         spёk dicant

                                           

 

Secunda persona μφατικῶς admittit et nominativum accentuatum verbo praeponit, ut dü ðou rёd, lege tu; dü yï tёch, docete vos.

                                                                                  

        futurum

               

        ðou         shalt

               

        luv          amato

               

        hï         shal

               

        luv          amato

               

        
        

                             

        tёch doceto

               

        tёch  doceto

               

        ille

                             

        spёk dicito

               

        spёk  dicito

               

        
        

                                  

 

 

 

 

                                                                           

        pluraliter

               

        yï         shal

               

        luv          amatote

               

        
        

        

ðei         shal

        


        

               

        luv          amanto

                             

        tёch docetote

               

        tёch docento

                             

        spёk dicitote

               

        spёk dicunto         [n. p.]

                                  

 

Potentialis modi

                                                                                                                          

         tempus          praesens

                 

         J          mai

                 

         luv                    

                 

         ðou          maist

                 

         luv                    

                 

         

         

         

         

ðei

                 

         mai

                 

         luv

                 

         amem

                                 

         tёch

                 

         tёch

                 

         tёch

                 

         doceam

                                 

         spёk

                 

         spёk

                 

         spёk

                 

         dicam

                                           

 

Futurum inde fit, addito singulis personis hёrafter, ut J mai luv hёrafter, ðou maist luv hёrafter, hoc est amem posthac, sive amavero, amaveris, etc.

 

                                                                                                              

        imperfectum

               

        J         mjħt

               

        luv                  

               

        ðou         mjħt’st

               

        luv                  

               

        

        

        

        

ðei

               

        mjħt

               

        luv

               

        ama

               

        
        

                             

        tёch

               

        tёch

               

        tёch

               

        doce

               

        rem

                             

        spёk

               

        spёk

               

        spёk

               

        dice

               

        
        

                                  

 

                                                                                                                  

         Perfectum

                 

         J          mjħt hav

                 

         luved                    

                 

         ðou          mjħtst          hav

                 

         luved                    

                 

         

         

         

         

ðei

                 

         mjħt          hav

                 

         luved                    

                                 

         tauħt

                 

         tauħt

                 

         tauħt

                                 

         spökn

                 

         spökn

                 

         spökn

                                           

 

      

   amaverim,    docuerim, dixerim, eris, erit, etc.

    

Modi infinitivi

 

                                                                                  

        praesens

               

        tu

               

        luv          amare

               

        quod         etiam est futurum, addito

        

hёrafter,         ut tu

               

        luv          

               

        hёrafter

                             

        tёch docere

               

        tёch 

                             

        spёk dicere

               

        spёk 

                                  

 

      

   amaturum,    docturum, dicturum esse

    

 

                                                             

        perfectum

               

        tu         hav

               

        luved          amavisse

                             

        tauħt docuisse

                             

        spökn dixisse

                                  

 

Per praesens infinitivi reddimus supinum prius, futurum [n. p.] in rus, et gerundium in dum, ut tu luv, amare, amatum, amaturus, amandum.

                                                      

        adiectiva         verbalia activa

               

        luving          amans

                             

        tёching docens

                             

        spёking dicens

                                  

 

Haec in omni coniugatione ab ipso themate formantur, adiecto ing; quemadmodum etiam et nomen agentis apposito er, ut a luver, a tёcher, a spёker, amator, doctor, qui loquitur; quam formam etiam et illa a substantivis enata sequuntur, ut a forest, saltus, forester, saltuarius; a kloth, pannus, klöðier, lanarius; a köl, carbo, kolier, carbonarius.

Hinc etiam sunt gerundia, ilud in di, per signum genitivi casus of; illud in do, per signum ablativi in, ut of luving, amandi, in luving, amando.

 

                                                      

        adiectiva         verbalia passiva

               

        luved          amatus

                             

        tauħt doctus

                             

        spökn dictus

                                  

 

Haec semper exeunt in d, t, aut n; servata aut mutata figurativa praesentis cum adiuncta consona, ut supra in coniugationibus dictum est.

Vox passiva fit per variationem temporum verbi substantivi tu bï, cum adiectivo verbali passivo. Exempla:

 

Modi indicativi

                                                                                  

        praesens

        

J         am

               

        luved

               

        ðou         art

               

        luved

               

        hï         iz

               

        luved amor

                             

        tauħt

               

        tauħt

               

        tauħt doceor

                             

        spökn

               

        spökn

               

        spökn dicor         [n. p.]         

                                  

 

 

                                                                                                          

         pluraliter

                 

         wï          ar

                 

         luved

                 

         yï          ar

                 

         luved                    

                 

         ðei          ar

                 

         luved 

                                 

         tauħt

                 

         tauħt

                 

         tauħt 

                                 

         spökn

                 

         spökn

                 

         spökn 

                                           

 

Et quum unum omnium modorum, et temporum verbale sit; satis erit primam personam exemplo posuisse; ceterae, ex forma verbi tu bï, adiectivo subiuncto, apparebunt.

 

Futurum J shal bï tauħt aut J wil bï tauħ, docebor.

Imperfectum J was tauħt, ðou wast tauħt, hï wast tauħt, , , ðei wer tauħt, docebar.

Perfectum J hav n tauħt, fui doctus.

Indefinitum I had tauħt, fueram doctus.

 

Imperativi

Praesens, let mï tauħt, docear; ðou tauħt, docere; let him tauħt, doceatur. Pluraliter, let us tauħt, doceamur; bï yï tauħt, docemini; let ðem tauħt, doceantur.

Futurum, ðou shalt tauħt, docetor tu; let him tauħt, docetor ille. Pluraliter, yï shal tauħt, doceminor, ðei shal tauħt, docentor.

 

Potentialis

                                                                               

          praesens

                   

          I           mai           tauħt docear

                                     

          futurum

                   

          I           mai           tauħt hёrafter            fuero doctus

                                     

          imperfectum

                   

          I           mjħt           tauħt essem           doctus

                                     

          perfectum

                   

          I           mjħt           hav n           tauħt doctus           fuerim

                                                     

 

Modi infinitivi

                                                                  

         praesens

                 

         tu                    tauħt doceri

                                 

         perfectum

                 

         tu          hav n          tauħt doctum          fuisse

                                 

         futurum

                 

         tu                    tauħt hёrafter doctum          iri

                                           

 

Supinum prius idem prorsus est cum praesenti infinitivo activo; posterius cum passivo, qua etiam voce reddimus [n. p.] verbalia in bilis et dus, ut tu bï tauħt, doceri, doctu, docendus, docilis.

 

Defectiva

Praeter signa quae diximus, et anomalum tu bï, quod ipsum etiam signum est in tota forma passiva; paucula nobis sunt defectiva: quae sequuntur.

J wot, scio; ðou wotst, raro hï wots, , , ðei wot. Borealibus saepius in usu est o, in ä, verso. Eodem sensu est I wit, scio, sed wjt vitupero fere evanuit.

J wist, scibam, in aliis personis nil variat; ðou wist, hï wist, , , ðei wist, caetera desunt.

I tröu, reor; ðou tröust, hï tröuz (hae autem duae personae rarius usurpantur) , , ðei tröu: sed interrogat saepius hoc verbum quam indicat. Eius verbale anomalum tru ratus, reliquis modis et temporibus caret. Koth vel quoth, ab antiquo cweth, voce maioribus nostris inflexa, cweth, cwethest, cwetheth, inquam, inquis, inquit; nunc manet invariabile, ut quoth I, quoth ðou, quoth hï, quoth wï, etc. inquam, inquis, etc. ad res ante dictas refertur, ut must, debeo vel oportet, ad res futuras. Invariabile etiam est must, sed nominativum sequitur, more aliorum verborum, ut I must, ðou must, hï must, wï must, yï must, ðei must: oportet me, te, illum, etc.

Hjħt, nomino aut nominor, in praesenti tantum indicativo valet. I hjħt, ðou hjħtst, , , , ðei hjħt, hinc bihjħt nuncupo aut voveo; et a näm, nomino; I bjnemt, nuncupavi, fere defecerunt. Sic häil et âlhäil, omnis salus, pro salve, salvete: tamen häil, salvus, apud Norfolcienses etiamnum obtinet. I go, eo, verbum integrum est coniugationis primae, nisi quod careat imperfecto: patres nostri substituerunt [n. p.] J yёd aut J yöd, ibam; nos J went, ðou wentst, , , , ðei went, a verbo adhuc nautis usitato tu wend, verto.

Perfectum J hav gön, ivi, etc. Sed eius compositum, tu forgö, amitto, imperfectum omnino non agnoscit; at tu förgö, praecedo, verbi simplicis formam subsequitur. Defectiva illa mai et kan, possum; et wil, volo (quae signa diximus), reliqua tempora et modos supplent per anomalum tu bï, et adiectiva cognatae significationis, ut J kan aut J mai, possum aut possim. J küld aut J mjħt, poteram, aut possem. Indicat:

 

           

    perfectum,     J     hav n     äbl,     potui

             

    indefinitum,     J     had     n     äbl,     potueram

             

    futurum,     J     shal          äbl

        

 

Potentialis perfectum J mjħt hav bïn äbl, potuerim; futurum, I mai bï äble herafter, potuero; infinitivi praesens, tu äbl, posse. Sic I wil, volo aut volam; I wüld, volebam aut vellem. Indicativum perfectum I hav n wïling, volui; I had n wïling, volueram, etc. Hinc compositum unum I nil, nolo, et I nould, nolebam, veteribus frequens erat. Sed quemadmodum hoc verbum nil, sic etiam illa quae usitata sunt, per adiectiva circumloquimur, ut I am unwiling, nolo; I am wiling, volo; I am äbl, possum; I am mör wiling, malo, quorum omnium una forma est in reliquis modis et temporibus, qua modo diximus. Shal ultra shüld nullo modo variatur, et häv a verbis perfectis desumuntur.

Si coniunctiones ðoħ aut âlðoħ, quamvis; so ðat, modo; eksept, nisi; if, si; but if, at si, adfuerint; modus potentialis signa sua mai, kan, etc. saepenumero amittit.

Atque haec est verborum nostratium forma, quatenus cum latinis analogiam habent. Sed uti omnis alia lingua, sic etiam anglica suos [I] habet idiotismos, qui latine vix, aut omnino reddi non possunt. Unum in tempore coniunctivo futuri praeterito, ut when I shal hav tauħt mj skolars, I wil kum tu yü, ad sensum aliqualem, quum finem facerim docendi discipulos meos, veniam ad te. Neque per docuerim, nec per docuero, expresse satis dicitur, quia shal hav tauħt est temporis utriusque. Illud igitur, quum Karthaginem deleveris, triumfum egeris, censorque fueris, et obieris legatus AEgyptum; delegere iterum absens consul: ad rei sensum sic melius explicatur, quam aut gestu Roscius, aut ipse orator omni copia adhibita indicare potuerit: When ðou shalt hav wästed Karthaeʒ, when ðou shalt hav ended ðj trjumf, and shalt hav bïn Sensor, and governed Eʒipt az Lïftenant: ðou shalt bï chözn konsul ðe sekond tjm in ðjn absens. Sed latissimus est usus adiectivi verbalis activi. Hinc enim non gerundia tantum, et illa quae HEbraei formant per בכלם; sed innumera etiam alia indicantur. Et quia omnia huiusmodi sunt cum tempore substantiva (actionem enim in illo tempore significant de quo instituitur sermo) difficillimum erit, latine vim eorum explicare. Accedunt quidem illa proxime, quae per antia aut entia fiunt a verbalibus; deinde illa a supinis in io sed huiusmodi non sunt ubique obvia, ut mj luving and späring of yü, mäks yü ðe wurs. Verbum verbo reddere non licet, mea amantia et parcentia vestri, vos deteriores reddit: si amor et indulgentia dixeris, sensum peregrinum attuleris. Tertius est idiotismus in neutris; quae quidem nobis paucula sunt; quia pleraque passivorum etiam formam induunt, nonnulla etiam significationem. Ut đus iz mj welth ëtn and drunk out, sic mea copia editur et ebibitur. I am run out of breth, est sensu temporis perfecti cucurri, et praesentis donec anhelus sum. Quaedam eodem sensu et neutra sunt, et neutropassiva, ut I käm hiðer aut I was kum hiðer beför yü, huc veniebam ante te.

Impersonalia natura pauca sunt, it rainz, pluit; it thunderz, tonat; it waxeth dai, diescit; it drauz toward njht, noctescit, etc. tamen a personalibus multa fiunt, iisque ut plurimum neutris, si tertiae personae singulari praeponas articulum neutrius generis it, ut it bikumeth, decet; it hapneth, accidit; it chaunseth, contingit, etc. Quaedam ab adiectivis fiunt, cum verbo iz et haec sunt passiva, ut it iz said, dicitur; it iz reported, fertur; it iz givn out, spargitur in vulgus; aut neutra, ut it iz manifest, patet; it iz lauful, licet; it iz mït, convenit; it iz sertain, certum est. [n. p.] Horum autem variatio satis patet a tertia persona singulari verbi tu bï, ut it iz said, dicitur; it waz said, dicebatur; it hath bïn said, dictum fuit; it had bïn said, dictum fuerat; it wil bï said, dicetur. Caetera persequere in forma verbi tu bï. In aliis habenda ratio est coniugationis ipsius verbi unde desumpta sunt: nam pro mutatione characteristicae, aut adiunctae consonae, variatur ipsum impersonale, ut in prima coniugatione: it bisïmeth, decet; it bisïmed, decebat; it hath bisïmed, decuit; it had bisïmed, decuerat; it shal bisïm, decebit, etc. In secunda, it bikumeth, decet. Futurum, it wil bikum; imperfectum, it bïkäm; perfectum, it hath bikum; indefinitum, it had bikum. Modus Imperativum, praesens, let it bikum; futurum, it shal bikum; potentialis praesens, it mai bikum; futurum, it mai bikum hёrafter; imperfectum, it mjħt bikum; perfectum, it mjħt hav bikum; infinitivus praesens, tu bikum. Sin inflexio fiat per duth et did, nulla est figurativae mutatio, ut ante in personalibus dictum est, ut it duth bikum, it did bikum, it hath bikum, etc.

 

CAPUT XIII

De consignificativis

 

Vox consignificativa articulos comprehendit, adverbia item, coniunctiones, praepositiones, interiectiones. Articuli praepositivi sunt tantum a et ðe, relativi sive subiunctivi inter personalia satis apparuerunt. De adverbiis illud unicum adnotandum, omnia ferme adiectiva adverbiascere adiecta particula lj, ut a lauful, legitimus, laufullj, legitime; a kurteus, humanus, kurteuslj, [I 2] humaniter; a trim, nitidus, trimlj, nitide. Et sic respondetur latinis in ter et e, ut a felix, hapi, feliciter, hapilj; a doctus, lerned, docte, lernedlj. Et quia in his invariabilibus nihil difficultatis est, praeter ipsam vocum cognitionem, classes enim eaedem sunt, ut usus idem qui latinae et aliis linguis; ad lexicographos harum rerum studiosum lectorem ablegabo.

 

Syntaxis est tertia

Logonomiae pars, de vocum constructione. Eius regulas praecipue tradam, quae linguae anglicae sunt homogeneae: quae autem ex latini sermonis regulis innotescere possunt, eas subindicasse satis habeo, aut etiam omnino neglexisse.

 

CAPUT XIV

Syntaxeos uniuersae διαγραφὴ primum eius genus expeditum

 

Syntaxis est simplex aut schematistica: simplex, qua vulgo inter scribendum utimur et loquendum; schematistica, sive figurata est; quae necessitatis, aut ornatus gratia, aliquo sermonis lumine enitescit. Est etiam syntaxis orationis solutae, aut numeris adstrictae. Cuiuscunque modi autem sit, est absoluta, convenientiae, aut rectionis.

Absoluta.

1. Omnia substantiva absolute cum aliis construi possunt, ut đe gud examplz of pärents öuht to bë a rvl of ljf tu ðe children, bona exampla parentum debent [n. p.] esse vitae norma liberis. Hiic examplz absolute cum aliis construitur.

2. Adiectiva sine substantivis posita, modus item infinitivus, nonnunquam etiam vox consignificativa, saepe clausula sive membrum, substantivorum syntaxin sequuntur.

3. Nominativus absolutus apud anglos ita usurpatur, uti apud latinos ablativus, ut I bïing prëzent, hï durst not hav dun it; me praesente, hoc facere ausus non fuisset. Hï bïing in trubl, hiz frindz forsük him; illo molestiis implicato, amici eum deseruerunt.

4. Laus et vituperium absolute in genitivo usurpatur, ut hi iz a man of grët spirit, vir est magni animi.

 

CAPUT XV

Secunda syntaxeos species

 

Ea est convenientiae: estque triplex, ut in dato superius exemplo, đe gud examplz of pärents öuht to bë a rvl of ljf tu ðe children, prima est adiectivi gud, cum substantivo examplz; secunda, verbi öuht, cum nominativo; tertia, substantivi eodem casu appositi rvl; neque ultra est ulla syntaxis convenientiae.

1. Adiectiva quia nec casibus, nec numero mobilia sunt, (numeralibus exceptis) non possunt cum substantivo non cohaerere, ut a lërned man, vir doctus; lërned men, viri docti.

2. Substantiva sterilia, id est, quae nullum adiectivi faetum pepererunt, ipsius adiectivi vicem supplent, ut ðe së-water, aqua marina; a peuter-salt, salinum stanneum; quia [I 2] et peuter, adiectiva non producunt.

3. Propria multa sterilia sunt et sterilium vicem subeunt, ut a Lundon dj, tinctura Londinensis; an Oxford gluv, cheirotheca Oxoniensis; Köts wöuld wul, lana a montibus Dobunorum; a Wiðam pjk, lucius Withamensis; Wustershïr salt, sal Vigorniensis. Quaedam tamen adiectiva habent, ut a Frensh Kroun, aureus gallicus; Spanish wjn, vinum hispanicum; an Indian fig, ficus indica; a Frâns, Spain, India, sive Ind.

4. Ex numeralibus, cardinalia cum substantivis aliquoties non cohaerent; nempe in spacii, aut temporis mensura, ut thrï füt hjħ, tres pedes altus aut alti; tuenti yër aut tuenti yërz öld, viginti annos natus; a hors thirtïn handful aut thirtïn handfulz hjħ, equus tredecim palmos altus; I hav wâlkt fjv mjl aut mjlz, ambulavi quinque miliaria, ubi füt singulare tantum est; reliqua yër, handful, mjl aut singularia esse possunt, aut pluralia. Reliqua temporis – a minut, minutum; an ouer, hora; a dai, dies; an äʒ, aetas – et spacii – an insh, uncia; a finger, digitus; a span, spithama; a yërd, trium pedum virgula; an el, ulna, duorum cubitorum mensura; a päs, passus; a përch, pertica; an äker, iugerum; a furlong, stadium – hanc anomaliam non admittunt. Uti nec illa priora, nisi adsit adiectivum mensuram subindicans, ut long, longus; wjd, amplus; bröd, latus; thik, crassus; dïp, profundus, etc. aut huiusmodi adverbia over, superne; abuv, supra; under, infra, etc. Pretii nomen etiam in mensura est si aestimetur minis, ut It stands mï in ten pound aut ten poundz, stat decem minis. Reliqua pretii nomina pens, shilingz, etc. regularia sunt.

5. Atque ut lectori satis faciam numeralia attexam, eorumque syntaxin. ön 1, 2, thrï 3, föur 4, fjv 5, [n. p.] six 6, sevn 7, aiħt 8, njn 9, ten 10, elevn 11, tuelv 12, thirtïn 13, fourtïn 14, fiftïn l5, sixtïn 16, sevntïn 17, aiħtïn 18, njntïn 19, tuenti 20, thirti 30, forti 40, fifti 50, sixti 60, sevnti 70, aiħti 80, njnti 90, a hundred 100, tü hundred 200, thrï hundred 300, etc., a thouzand 1000, tü thouzand 2000, etc., a milion 100000. In numeris compositis maior praecedit minorem, ut tuenti ön 21, thirti tü 32, forti thrï 43, a thousand six hundred and aiħtïn 1618, et. ad 1000000 et deinceps aut contra, minor maiorem, ut ön and tuenti, tü and thirti, thrï and forti, six and fifti, njn and fifti 59. Sed ulterius hanc formam non prosequeris.

Ordinalia sunt first, primus; sekond, secundus; third, tertius; föurth 4; fift 5; sixt 6; sevnth 7; aiħt 8; njnth 9; tenth 10; elevnth 11; tuelfth 12; thirtinth 13; föurtïnth, etc., tuentith 20; thirtith 30; fortith 40; etc., hundreth 100; thouzanth 1000; et sunt omnia singularia; at inflexa sunt declinationis secundae, ut tenths, decimae; fiftïnths, decimae-quintae; hundreths, centenarii. In compositis, post 20, minor anteit, ut ðe ön et tuentith 21; ðe tü et thirtith 32; ðe thrï et fortith 43; ðe njn et fiftith 59; tum cessa: posthac enim maior praeponitur minori, ut ðe tü hundred sixti and seventh sjd, pagina ducentesima sexagesima septima.

Observa in ordinalibus compositis, omnes numeros cardinalium terminatione proferri, praeter ultimum; qui caeteris ordinalium more coronidem addit.

Est nobis et alia numerationis formula per skörz et maxime post 60, singuli autem 20, dicuntur a skör. Atque haec numerandi ratio, et in cardinalibus valet, et in ordinalibus. Cardinalibus, ut thrï skör and ön, , thrï, ten, sixtïn, etc. 60 et 1, 2, 3, 10, 16, etc. föur skör 80, fjv skör [n. p.] 100, six skör, etc. ad twenti skör, i.e. 400: rarius inde ad forti njn skör, i.e. 980, nunquam ulterius. Frequens admodum est haec numeratio per skörz, in viris ad 200; in ovibus, armentis, et passibus, ad ultimum persequere. Sic in ordinalibus, post 60 dicas ðe thrï skör and first, sekond, tenth, fiftïnth, sexagesimus primus, secundus, decimus, decimus quintus; ðe föur skör and third, föurth, twelfth, sixtïnth, etc, i.e. octogesimus tertius, quartus, duodecimus, decimus sextus, sed raro hiic ultra ducentesimum progredieris.

Sunt et aliae numerationes per duznz, i.e. dodecatemorias, per dikarz, i.e. decadas, et in singulis fere officinis aliae atque aliae; quas quidem silentio involvere debeo logomus, quia in iuris descriptione continentur. An. 14. Ed. 3.

6. 1. Articuli praepositivi a et ðe solis substantivis communibus et eorum formam sequentibus praeponuntur, ut a King, βασιλεὺς; a aut ðe Quïn, βασιλίσσα; a aut ðe bodi, τὸ σῶμα. Si adsit adiectivum, interponitur inter articulum et suum substantivum, ut a gud man, vir bonus; nisi forte adiectivum suo substantivo postponatur, ut a man trv of hiz wurd, vir cuius sermoni inest veritas.

2. Est autem differentia in horum articulorum usu. Nam praeterquam quod a solis singularibus adhaereat, ðe utrisque numeris adiungatur; Laxior quidam usus est a quam ðe: quia a indefinite, ðe autem strictius et quodammodo relative ad id quod sequitur usurpatur, ut a man mai sï what it iz tu dü for unthankful personz, cuius hic sensus est, videre cuilibet licet quid sit beneficium ingratis hominibus conferre. Hic non licuit dixisse ðe man, quemadmodum ubi de solo particulari sermo est, usurpabis [n. p.] ðe, not a, ut đe Grësian Empjr flurished möst under Alexander, Graecorum imperium maxime floruit sub Alexandro.

3. Est etiam ubi locus conceditur utrisque indifferenter, nempe, quoties id quod magis universaliter dicitur per a, potest etiam discretius dici per ðe, ut a krvel man shal not dj in pës, crudelis vir non morietur in pace; at ðe krvel man shal not dj in pës, emfasin quandam habet.

4. Quin etiam per solos articulos sensus aliquando fit multum diversus, ut Tomas iz a gud man, Thomas est vir bonus; Tomas iz ðe gud man, id est, Thomas est maritus, aut paterfamilias. Sic a man, vir; man, homo, ut homo nata est, shï waz born man.

5. Eadem syntaxeos forma admittit a, aut ðe cum positivo, et cum superlativo ðe tantum, ut innosensj iz a svr säfgard, innocentia est firmum praesidium; innosensj iz ðe svrest säfgard, innocentia est firmissimum praesidium.

6. Substantiva solitaria, id est, sine ulla ad aliud relatione posita, articulos negligunt, ut virtv alön mäks men hapi, virtus sola beatos efficit.

7. Metalla, frumenta, herbae, quae numero anomala diximus, articulum a non accipiunt, nisi ecliptice, ut it iz a fërn, supple bush, stâk, lëf, etc. It iz a brëd ðat nurisheth wel, panis est qui bene nutrit, id est genus panis.

8. Nomina propria distinctionis causa articulos admittunt, ut hï is a Gil, id est, unus est, cuius nomen est Gil; non autem ðe, nisi κατξοχν, ut ðe Talbot, i.e. princeps familiae Talbotorum, aut insigni aliquo facinore illustriss: plurali autem collectivum adiicitur ðe, ut ðe Grehamz, i.e. universa Grimaeorum familia.

9. Propria etiam propter eclipsin assumunt ðe, ut hj [K] waz droun’d in ðe Temz, subintellecto flumine aut aqua, in fluvio Tamisi, aut in aqua Tamisis submersus est.

10. Adiectivis post propria per ξήγησιν adiicitur ðe, ut Alexander ðe grët, Alexander ille magnus; Philip ðe faier, Philippus cognomento Pulcer; Hektor ðe Troʒan, Hector Troianus.

11. Adiectivis pro substantivis usurpatis adiungitur articulus ðe, ut

 

Đe long ar läzi, ðe litl ar loud,

Đe fäir ar slutish, ðe foul ar proud.

Procerae ignauae sunt, pusillae canorae:

Venustae sunt sordidae, deformes superbae.

 

Ubi mulieres necessario subintellectae sunt. Itemque in neutris absolutis, ut hj iz kum tu ðe hjest, ad summum pervenit; J hav hit ðe whjt, album percussi, pro meta alba.

12. Ubi substantivum praecessit, articuli a aut ðe cum adiectivis relative subiunguntur, ut Mari no wjf: for a bad ön iz an endles trubl whjl shï livz; a gud ön, a lasting soröu when shï iz ded; uxorem ne ducas: quoniam mala, perpetua est molestia dum vivit; bona dolorem facit indesinentem postquam mortua fuerit. Aʒax, bïng mad, kild ðe Grësianz shïp: ðe fat, supözing ðem tu bï komaunderz; ðe lën, thinking ðem tu bï komonsöldierz; Aiax insanus graecorum oves mactavit: ratus pingues duces esse; macilentas gregarios miletes arbitratus. But ðe fifti which had run awai, etc. At vero quinquaginta illi quos fugam elapsos esse diximus, etc.

13. Hanc formam sequuntur superlativa, ut among ðe filosoferz, Plato waz ðe möst lërned; inter philosophos Plato doctissimus fuit; et comparatiua: what am J ðe beter for it? quid ego deinde melior? aut quanto mihi maius commodum inde redundavit? Sed quamvis haec sit usitata [n. p.] loquendi formula, tamen ðe hic πλεονάξει.

Personalia quaedam, säm, cum adiunctis self et veri, substantivorum vicem subeunt cum articulo ðe, ut ðe säm, idem; ðe self säm, ðe veri säm, ipsissimus. Sic et shï, in discretione sexus, ut a aut ðe , i.e. mas; a aut ðe shï, i.e. faemina.

15. Possessiva articulos excludunt, ut mj Masters bük, mei praeceptoris liber. Nominativo autem praecedenti licuit attexuisse articulum; sed nullo modo substantivo cui adhaeret possessivum, ut ðe bük of mj Mastër.

16. Numeralia ön, , thrï, etc. multitudinis item notae, äl, omnes; everj, unusquisque; mani, multi (nam a mani est multitudo, sive ipsa turba, et mani a man, i.e. magna pars hominum); sum, aliquis; ani, ullus; nön, nullus, etc. cum articulis raro conveniunt, ut thrï men, tres viri; âl men, omnes homines; no man, nullus vir. Etiam his subintellectis idem fit, ut ðei späred neiðer man, nor chjld; nec seni, nec puero pepercerunt; subintellecto anj, ulli. Sed a skör, a hundred, a thouzand, a milion, quia substantiva censentur, adsciscunt sibi articulos, ut a hundred men, centenarius hominum; at vero, tü hundred, thrï hundred, etc. numerique omnes compositi, nisi relative copiantur, articulos extrudunt.

17. Articuli subiunctivi, quae et personalia sive pronomina dicuntur whü, which, ðat, etc. si indefinite usurpentur, uti alia adiectiva, casu et numero cum substantivis cohaerent: si interrogative aut relative, more substantivorum construuntur.

 

Verbum cum nominativo

 

Sic fiut syntaxis adiectivorum: sequitur illa quae est verbi cum praecedenti nominativo numero, et persona, cohaerentis. [K 2] Exceptiones in anomalia loci, 1. personae, 2. numeri 3.

1. Interrogatio praeponit verbum nominativo, ut kanst ðou dü ðis? potes tu hoc facere? et secunda persona imperativi praesentis, ut luv ðou, ama tu; tëch yï, docete vos. Itemque interdum fit quando verbo praeponitur adverbium hïer, hic, ut hïer am J, hîc adsum. Semper in pleonasmo it et ðër, ut, ðër käm a man tü mï, venit ad me quidam; it iz mj bruðer, est frater meus. Sic cum coniunctionibus nonnullis, aut posstis, ut neiðer art ðou hï whüm J lük for, nec tu ille es quem ego expecto; aut subintellectis, ut wër J äbl tu dü az yü sai, i.e. if J wër äbl, si possem. Bi a wjf never so shreud, hir huzband iz bound tu luv her, quantumcunque iracunda est uxor, marito tamen cara esse debet; pro ðoh a wjf never bï so shreud. Quoties vocula relationem ad praecedentia subindicans antecedit verbum, nominativus non raro sequetur, ut ðat sai J, hoc dico ego; so did our fäðerz, sic fecerunt patres nostri; ðus hav ðei determined, sic censuerunt illi. Verum hoc non obtinet ubique, ut so J sai, sic dico.

2. Personale it, id, quia aliquid substratum intelligit, verbum a prima aut secunda persona abripit in tertiam, ut it iz J, ego sum; it iz ðou ðat hast dun it, tu ille es qui hoc fecisti.

3. Verbum, inter duo substantiva diversorum numerorum positum, cum alterutro convenire potest, quoties adsunt which aut ðat; quae quidem aut rei relativa sunt, aut personae, ut ðe of-spring of men which iz tu kum aut etiam which ar tu kum, soboles futurorum hominum, aut soboles hominum quae futura est. Sin fiat reditio per whü qui vel quae (quia whü, non rei, sed personae tantum relativum est) verbum adhaerebit substantivo personae, ut ðe of-spring [n. p.] of men whü ar tu kum, non whü iz. Sic etiam casus inter duo verba, nunc cum hoc, nunc cum illo construitur, ut let Tomas kum in, J mën hï ðat käm yister dai aut I mën him; ingrediatur Thomas ille (inquam) qui venit heri, aut illum intelligo qui, etc.

 

Appositio

 

Tertia convenientia fit appositione. Fit autem appositio multimodis: affirmatione, ut a virtüs King iz ðe chïf tresvr of hiz kingdum, rex omnibus virtutibus exaggeratus, summus est regni sui thesaurus. Quaestione, ut art ðou ðat Enëas? Tune ille AEneas. Comparatione, ut knöuleʒ iz beter ðen welth, scientia melior est quam divitiae. Coniunctione copulativa, ut ðe Vniversitjz of Oxford and Kämbriʒ, uniuersitates quae sunt Oxonii et Cantabrigiae. Aut discriminativa, ut neiðer wjn nor wïmen ever müv’d him, nec vinum nec mulieres animum eius unquam pepulerunt. Aut rxceptiva, ut no man went in with him but J, nemo cum illo ingressus est nisi ego. Etiam, verbi vi, nominativi diuersi aut cum copula, aut sine copula, apponuntur, ut hiz näm iz Wiliam, ille nominatur Wilhelmus. A Guʒeon, a Smelt, a Söl, and a Samon, wer täkn âl in ön net; gobio, perlanus, solea, et salmo in uno reti omnes capti sunt. Sic si substantivi, etiam adiectiva multa invicem adhaerent, ut shï iz a chäst, et a luving, et a diskrït wjf; et casta est, et pia, et prudens matrona. A käv dark, unëzi, dölful, kumfortles; cavea obscura, molesta, luctuosa, inconsolabilis, i.e. ubi nullum solatium. Et si haec ad primam convenientiae syntaxim referas, non repugno.

Nominativi etiam ipsius vi, multa verba in eodem tempore, numero, et persona apponuntur, ut hï lasht, [K 3] and füin’d, and kikt, and krj’d; caesim feriebat, et punctim, et calcitrabat, et plorabat.

 

Exceptio

 

Accusativi him, her, ðem, cum self aut selvz quibuslibet casibus apponuntur, ut

 

                       

    ħï     him-self

       

    hath

       

    dun     it

       

    ille     ipse

       

    fecit

             

    ðe     Ladi her-self

       

    ipsamet     domina

             

    ðei     ðem-selvz

       

    hav

       

    illi     ipsi

       

    fecerunt

             

    ðe     pïpl ðem-selvz

       

    populus     ipse

        

 

Ðe krvelti of Sëzar him-self, ipsius Caesaris crudelitas; J deliverd yür leter tu ðe man himself, literas tuas ipsi homini de manu in manum dedi, etc. Prima autem et secunda persona cum primitivis possessiva adsumunt, ut J mj-self writ it, egomet ipse scripsi. Sic, ðou ðj-self, tu ipse; wï our-selvz, nosmet ipsi; yï your selvz ar witnesez, vosmet ipsi testes estis.

 

CAPUT VXI

Syntaxis rectionis

 

Est casuum et verbi. Illam primo dabimus; post istam. Casuum rectio est a nomine, verbo, et consignificativa voce. Et quia hinc sunt omnium casuum signa, consignificativorum syntaxim initio docebimus.

Genitivo possidentis excepto, omnes casus nostri, terminatione sunt unus casus, signis tantum dissitus, aut loco, quia nominativus censebitur, quando praecedit verbo: accusativus quando subsequitur. Signa autem illa sunt praepositiones: quas ne seorsum quaeras, simul, et semel exponam, earumque syntaxin. [n. p.]

 

                    

    Accusativum     regunt

       

    bitwïn,     inter

             

    a,     ad

       

    intu,     in

             

    about

       

    circa     vel

       

    njħ,     prope vel iuxta

             

    circiter

       

    thuro     aut

       

    per

             

    abuv,     supra

       

    throuħ

             

    akording     ,     secundum

       

    respondent     etiam compositis          

             

    after,     post

       

    a     trans, ut transeo, J     pas          

             

    against

       

    contra     vel

       

    thuro

             

    adversus,     in

       

    toward     aut

       

    versus

             

    compositione     gain, ut tu

       

    towardz

       

    erga

             

    gainsai,     contradicere

       

    tu,     ad

             

    among,     inter 3 aut plures

       

    without,     extra

             

    at,     apud, saepe ad

       

    within,     intra

             

    behjnd,     pone

       

    untu,     ad, usque

             

    bineth,     infra

       

    cis     et citra sic circumloquimur

             

    bisjd

       

    praeter

       

    on     ðis sjd,

             

    iuxta

       

    ab     hac parte, et penes     

             

    biyond

       

    trans

       

    in     ðe pouer,     ut te penes     

             

    ultra

       

    imperium,     ðe     rvl iz in yür pour,     aut usitatius,     it iz in yür pour tu komaund

             

    
    

        

Ablativum regere censebuntur alia quae sequuntur; quia illis respondent quae casum latinum postulant.

              

    
    

    

far     of, procul

       

    under,     sub, subter

             

    from,     a, ab, abs

       

    on     aut upon, super

             

    in,     in

       

    privily,     clam

             

    opnlj,     palam

       

    with,     cum; out-of, ex

             

    up     tu, tenus

       

    ðen,     post comparativum     

             

    
    

       

    resolvitur     per quam, ut

        

Her hart iz harder ðen a diamond, cor eius est adamante durius. Sic etiam utimur bj, ut hjer bj a füt, uno pede altior. [n. p.]

 

Variis casibus inserviunt

 

Of genitivo videlicet, respondet etiam praepositionibus de, e, ex; et a, ab, abs, ut J hërd it of him; ex, aut ab illo audivi.

Tu dativi signum est et respondet praepositioni ad; nonnunquam usque; vel tenus, ut hï wäded tu ðe chin, mento tenus. For dativo inservit, et accusativo, ubi significat ad, aut propter; et ablativo, cum respondet [pro.] Aför aut biför, ante, prae, coram; quam vocem saepe vertimus tu hiz fäs, aut fäs tu fäs, ad faciem. In compositione, för: ut, tu förtel praedico. Bj, secus, iuxta, aut per; vel à, ab, abs; ut, a fäðer ouħt tu bi onored bj hiz children, pater à liberis honorari debet. Praepositio with, cum, in compositione, nonnunquam a proprio sensu in contrarium deflectit, ut tu withstand, contrastare; aliquando etiam extra compositionem, ut J wil fjħt with him, contra illum pugnabo.

Interiectio o vocativum regit, rarius idque μφατικωτέρος expressa: sed, hac intellecta, singulis hominum ordinibus honorem praefamur, pro suo cuiusque status et dignitatis gradu. Horum titulos, a fecialibus melius quam a me, perdisces: maiora tamen illa nomina praetervectus; hoc logonomus edico, ne quenquam vel in ima quidem faece plebis appelles ðou tu (quia hoc aut contemnentis est, aut nimium familiariter blandientis) sed , vos, quia tantum a contemptu liber populus abesse vult, quantum a servilibus exterorum quorundam officiis, manus et pedes deosculandi. Accusativum si regat, semper exprimitur, ut ô mï! aut etiam ai mï! o me! Ex reliquis interiectionibus tres sunt duntaxat qui casus regunt. Alak aut alas, vocativo iungitur, aut dativo, ut alak bruðer, hou kan J help [n. p.] it? Heu frater quam opem ego afferre possum? Alas for him, hei illi, aut potius hei mihi pro illo.

Fj, cum on aut upon, cum accusativo construitur, ut fj upon ðï, apagesis.

cum dativo sine signo usurpatur, ut wö iz mï, vae mihi, quamvis revera substantivi potius syntaxin subire videtur quam interiectionis, ut wö iz mï for him, miseria est mihi pro illo. Itemque adiective J am wö for him, aut wö bïgön, dolore victus sum.

 

Substantiva casus regentia

 

Genitivus possidentis, i.e. qui a nominativo fit s vel z, adiectis, eius locum saepenumero supplet qui a nominativo deflexit per signum of, ut mj fäðers servant, famulus patris mei; a frindz biznes, negotium amici. Caeterum, quia haec syntaxis rarissime locum habet in illis substantivis quae sterilia diximus, ut mj houshöld affairz, meae res domesticae; a glas windöu, fenestra vitrea; ubi non licuit dixisse houshöldz, aut glasez; proinde et hic, et in sterilibus adiective usurpatis, exteri errorem facillime vitabunt, si ipsum substantivum cum signo genitivi usurpent, ut ðe servant of mj fäðer; ðe biznes of mj frind; ðe affairz of mj houshöld; a windöu of glas; ðe wâter of ðe, aqua maris; a pjk of Wiðam, lucius e Withamo; sâlt of Wustershïr, sal e comitatu Vigorniae, etc.

2. Adeoque recepta est haec loquendi formula, ut adiectiva legitima sapae in suum substantivum commutet, ut pro a man, wjz, lërned, ʒvdisius, reliʒius, etc; vir sapiens, doctus, catus, pius; a man of wizdum, lerning, ʒuʒment, reliʒion, etc.; nunquam solitaria per hendialismum circumloquatur, ut pro lauyer, iurisperitus, a man [L] of lau. Hic tamen genitivi signum of, de, aliquoties migrat in at, ad, vel apud, ut pro armed man, a man at armz, miles; a serʒant at lau, serviens ad legem.

3. Personalia, pro primitivis derivativa substituunt, ut ðis hous of yürz iz ljk tu fâl, haec tua domus ruinam minatur, pro of yü; ðat foli of hiz wil undü him, haec eius dementia illum perdet, pro of him, etc. ubi etiam dixisse licuit; ðis yür hous, ðat hiz foli.

4. Signum of genitivo possidentis praepositum, defectum indicat substantivi, aut articuli praepositivi, ut hï hath stöln a hors of mj frindz, furto abstulit equum unum ex amici mei; supple equis: aut hï hath stöln ön of mj frinds horsez, abduxit unum, viz equum ex equis amici mei: quod etiam sic resolvi potest: hï hath stöln ön of ðe horsez of mj frind.

5. Substantiva paucula sunt, quae casum patrium postulant, aut dativum: cuiusmodi sunt luv, amor; hatred, odium; a , hostis; a frind, amicus; an enemj, inimicus; ut ðe luv of/tu lërning stirz up indëvor, amor doctrinae studium excitat; Sezar waz an enemj of ðe Gaulz, or tu ðe Gaulz, Caesar fuit hostis gallorum, aut gallis.

6. At plura sunt quae dativum exigunt, ut friendship, amicitial; kurtezi, humanitas; favor, benignitas; kjndnes, pietas; gudnes, bonitas; bounty, liberalitas; sin, peccatum, offens, etc.

Ex his autem quae dativum requirunt, pleraque cum praepositionibus towards, erga, aut against, contra, exponi possunt, ut his frowardnes tu mï, towards , aut against mï, waz ðe kauz of mj harshnes toward him; eius perversitas erga me, in causa fuit asperitatis meae contra illum.

7. Höp, spes; faith, fides; trust, fiducia; konfidens, fidentia; [n. p.] assvrans, certitudo; piti, misericordia; distrust, diffidentia; et si qua plura sunt cognatae significationis, cum variis casibus eodem sensu construuntur, ut mj höp of, on, aut in him mäd mï brëk mj faith tu, aut towards yü; mea spes in, aut de eo, fecit me fidem meam tibi datam fallere; his piti of, on aut towards ; misericordia eius de, in, aut erga me.

 

Adiectiva casus regentia

 

1. Adiectiva partitive posita, ut sum of us, aliquis nostrûm; ðe best of ðem, praestantissimus eorum; itemque desiderii, ut dezjrus of muni, cupidus pecuniae; notitiae, ut J am svr and sertain of ðis, huius rei certus sum; memoariae, ut mjndful of hiz promis, memor promissi; dubitationis, ut doutful of ðe end, dubius quomodo se eventus dabit; et pleraque his opposita, latinorum regulas sequuntur. Ex quibus quaedam etiam ablativo gaudent cum praepositione in, ut expert, kuning, skilful in song, cantandi peritus. Dicimus etiam, grïdi of aut after gain, avidus lucri, aut inhians lucro; thirsti after, tantum ut, thirsti after gain, lucri sitiens. Superlativa etiam per inter exponuntur, ut ðe richest among ðem, ditissimus inter eos.

2. Wurði, dignus; unwurði, indignus; born, natus aut editus; gilti, reus; genitivo tantum iunguntur, ut gilti of hjh trëzn, laesae Maiestatis reus.

3. Unum adiectivum copiae ful construitur cum of, ut ful of mët, cibi satur; etiam inopiae void aut devoid, vacuus, ut void of gräs, impius, et eo sensu frï ablativum expetit, ut frï from anger, vacuus ira; empti casum non admittit.

4. Haec variam syntaxin habent, desended of, aut from a nobl hous, clara ortus familia; weri of wurk, [L 2] laborem pertaesus; aut wëri with working, defessus laborando.

5. Profitabl, utilis; gud, bonus; hölsum, salutaris; ljħt, levis; grïvus, molestus; dier, carus; welkum, gratus; redi, paratus; wanting, qui vel quod abest; fit, aptus; ëqual, aequalis; proper, proprius; answerabl, congruous; akseptabl, acceptus; ljk, similis; joined, coniunctus; nier aut njħ, propinquus; akustomed, assuetus; frindlj, amicus, cum compositis disprofitabl, inutilis; unhölsum, insalubris; et oppositis il aut nauħt, malus; hatful, odiosus, et pluria adhuc adiectiva in ful, ut harmful, nocivus; helpful, auxiliaris, etc. quoties casum post se recipiunt, requirunt dativum, ut it iz profitabl for mï mihi, utile est; it iz a veri grïvus thing tu yü, res tibi permolesta est. Ex his tamen pleraque etiam aliam syntaxeos formam accipere possunt, ut in euerj thing ljk tu Merkurj, böth for hiz vois, et kuler; omnia Mercurio similis, vocemque coloremque. Ljk etiam et nier dativi signum non semper requirunt.

6. Kärful genitivum regit aut dativum, ut J am kärful of him, aut for him, de eo solicitus sum. Knöun, notus, et unknöun, igntous, dativum postulant, ut Terentia waz knöun tu Salust, Terentia nota est Salustio; et alio sensu genitivum, ut Terentia waz knöun of Salust, qui cum ea rem habuit.

7. Rich, dives; plentiful, copiosus; abundant, abundans; over-flöuing, superfluous; eksïding, excedens, et alia fortasse his similia, casum alium vix admittunt quam ablativum cum praepositione, ut rich in muni, pecunia dives. Sic present et absent, praesens, absens, ut J waz prezent with him at ðë fvneral, cum eo in funere aderam; for J kannot bï long absent from him, neque enim ab illo diutius abesse possum. Angri accusativum regit, aut ablativum, [n. p.] utrinque adiuncta praepositione, ut bï not angrï with mï, aut against mï, noli mihi succensere.

Infinita est adiectivorum turba quae casus non recipient, ut whjt, albius; blak, niger; hot, callidus; loud, canorus, etc. magnus etiam numerus eorum quae solum vi adiunctae vocis regunt, cuiusmodi illa sunt quae cum verbo it iz impersonaliter usurpantur, ut it iz plain, planum est.

Haec igitur de pura adiectivorum rectione dicta sint, de ea autem quae adiectivis cum aliis orationis partibus communis est, post dicetur in mensura, instrumento, etc.

 

Verba casus regentia

 

Nullum verbum post se nominativum recipit, nisi appositum praecedenti; quicquid delirant grammatici, ut Krasus wüld fain sïm a rich man, Crassus cupit videri dives; Sizero deservz tu bï thöuht an onest man, Cicero meretur existimari vir probus.

1. Tu akvz, tu kondemn, tu admonish, tu absolv, a latinis assumpta latinam etiam syntaxim habent, ut hï akvzed Hipia of adulterj, Hippiam adulterii arcessebat, quam forma et nostra sequuntur tu akquit, aut tu asoil, absolvo; tu rob, praedor; itemque tu deprjv, privo; tu spüil, spolio; tu disburðen aut tu ëz, levo, ut Sila robd ðe Sitisens of ðeir welth, and spüil’d ðem of ðeir ljvz; Sylla civium bona depraedatus est, ipsosque etiam vita privauit. J wil ëz yü of ðis burðen, Ego te hoc onere levabo.

 

Dativus post verbum

 

2. Tu attribut, acceptum ferre; tu imput, imputo; tu impart, impertio; tu ad, addo; tu sai, dico; tu ljkn, assimilo; [L 3] tu propöz, propono volunt accusativum rei et dativum personae, aut eius vicem gerentis, cum signo tu, ut yü mai wel ljkn ðe painz of a skülmaster tu ðat of a hors in a mil, ludimagistri laborem rite assimiles illi, qui est equi in mola asinaria; tu äplj, applico; tu ʒvin, adiungo volunt accusativum personae et dativum rei, ut aplj your self tu lërning, teipsum studiis adiunge.

3. Tu provjd, prospicio; tu kär, curo; tu bläm, crimini dare; tu läbor sive tu tvil, laboro; tu wurk, operor; tu täk painz, laborem impendere, etc. dativum saepe postulant cum signo for, ut J lâbor hier for a pür living, hic ego tenui victui laboro. Tu kompär habet tu aut with, ad vel cum. Tu bistöu, impertio, assumit upon, in vel super. Tu insult, upon, against, aut over. Tu put bifariam construitur, ut hï put ðe fault upon mi aut hï put mï in fâult, crimen mihi imposuit.

4. Tu send, mitto; tu yïld, concedo; tu harkn, ausculto; tu graunt, largior; tu promis, promitto; tu wish, opto; tu päi, solvo; tu giv, do; tu tel, narro; tu deklär, declaro; tu rekount, enumero; tu wrjt, scribo; tu deliver, trado, dativum accersunt aut cum signo, aut sine signo dativi, ut J wil graunt him a third part, aut J wil graunt a third part tu him, trientem illi condedam. Omnibus denique acquisitive positis integrum erit, dativum adiungere, ut ðe läbor wil bi tu mï, ðe profit wil redound tu yü; labor mihi erit, commodum tibi redundabit.

5. Quin et substantiva innumera quae vi sua casum non regunt, cum verbo tamen dativum adscriptum habent, ut hï bikäm svrti tu mï for Quinsius, vadem se mihi stitit pro Quintio.

6. Etiam et haec impersonalia in dativum feruntur: it bilongeth, spectat; it hapneth, contingit; it chanseth, accidit; [n. p.] it apertaineth, pertinet; it sïmeth, videtur; it apiereth, apparet; jt remaineth, restat, et omnia denique illa quae per adiectiva fiunt cum verbo iz, est, ut it iz lauful, licet; it iz mït, expedit. Quin et ipsum iz est impersonaliter acceptum, ut it iz for yür profit, in tuam rem est; it wil bï for yür onor, honori tuo conducet.

7. Et si latina quae cum praepositione ad in accusativo usurpantur huc etiam attuleris, per me licebit: unus enim sensus, est et nobis una syntaxis, ut hï had mani helps tu ðis grët welth, multa adiumenta habuit ad has grandes divitias.

 

Accusativus post verbum

 

Omne verbum activam significationem habens, aliquo sensu accusativum admittere potest. Illa tantum hic adnoto, quae apud latinos cum aliis casibus construuntur: tu enʒoi, fruor; tu vz, utor; tu want aut tu nïd, egeo; tu piti, misereor; tu remember, recordor; tu forget, obliviscor; tu resist, repugno; tu help, succurro; tu komaund, impero; tu get, potior; tu obai, obsequor; tu hurt, obsum, et alia plura quae respondent compositis a sum, ut tu govern, praesum, etc.; tu serv, servio; tu sufer, permitto; tu profit, commodo; tu avail, conduco; tu requjt, refero; tu advjz, consulo; tu welkum, gratulor; tu kredit aut belïv, fido aut credo; sed tu belïv in, ön, in unum credere; de solo dicitur Deo: tu intrët, supplico; tu prëvent, praevenio, et huiuscemodi fortasse plura. His adnumeres impersonalia it konserneth, refert; it grïveth, dolet; it plëzeth, placet; it displëzeth, displicet; it hurteth, nocet; it bïfâleth, accidit; it satisfjeth, satisfacit; it suffizeth, sufficit, et quae a superioribus personalibus fiunt: it profiteth, prodest; it auaileth, conducit, etc.

2. Accusativus ante infinitivum anglice vertitur per [n. p.] nominativum, ut sapientes existimant fortunam cedere consilio, wjz men think ðat fortvn givz pläz tu kounsel, a. v. sapientes existimant quod fortuna cedit consilium. Neutra accusativum regunt cognatae significationis, ut shï sïm’d tu go a grët wäi alön, Longam incomitata videtur ire viam.

3. Verba interrogandi, obsecrandi, docendi, duplicem regunt accusativum, rei et personae, ut ask him ðis question, interroga illum hanc questionem; quae forma variatur tamen, ut demaund aut ask ðis of him, percontare aut quaere hoc ab illo. Tu answer, respondeo; tu pardon aut forgiv, condono; accusativum rei et personae saepius quam dativum habent, ut answer mï ðis, hoc mihi responde. Dicimus tamen answer mï tu ðis püint, et answer ðus tu him. Et J pardon, aut J forgiv yü for it, hoc tibi condono.

4. Tu wunder, miror; tu marvail, admiror; tu bi amäzed, obstupesco, accusativum exigunt cum praepositione at, ut J wundred at him, illum demirabar, quam formam et alia non raro sequuntur; tu lük, aspicere; tu gäz, lustrare oculis; tu gäp, impudenter inspectare; tu stâr, stupidus intueri; tu run, incurro, etc. quibus saepe pro at, ad, subiungitur on aut upon, in vel super, ut lük at, on, vel upon ; vide me, vel in me intuere. Reliqua fere verba sensus regunt accusativum sine signis, accusativum inquam eius quod sentitur. Tu thrust, trudo; tu push, impeto; tu repïn, invideo, casum habent cum at aut against.

5. Pretii aut summae certae nomen in accusativum effertur post verba tu bï wurth, valeo; tu pai, solvo; tu giv, do; tu offer aut tu bid, offero; itemque tu boröu, mutuo accipere; tu lend, mutuo dare; tu pleʒ, oppignoro, ut a burd [n. p.] in ðe bag iz wurth tü on ðe snag, avis una in marsupio valet duas in aucupio. Tu kost, constare, cum pretio saepe accusativum personae adsumit illius cui emitur, ut ðis bük kost mï six shilingz, hic liber constabat mihi sex solidis. Verbis tu bj, emo; tu sel, vendo, substitues ablativum pretii cum praepositione for pro, ut hï böuħt a hors for fjv poundz, and söld him for twjs so much; emit equum quinque minis, et duplo vendidit. At tu stand effertur cum in, ut it standz mï in ten shilingz, constat mihi decem solidis. Post liceor tu prjz, liceo; tu bï prjzed, tu rät, pretium constituo; tu valv, censeo; tu estïm aut tu ʒuʒ, aestimo, subiunges at, ut J valv ðis hors at ten poundz, hunc equum decem minis aestimo. Tu estïm, tu höld, tu akount, laxius accepta, laxiorem etiam habent constructionem, ut I höld nothing of him, illum nihili facio; I höld it not wurth ðis, non huius aestimo.

 

Ablativus post verbum

 

Tu reward, munero; tu punish, mulcto; tu glut, exsaturo; tu fil, impleo; tu löd, onero, ablativum recipiunt cum praepositione with, ut dishonestj iz punished with disonor, vitae turpitudo infamia mulctatur. Tu abound cum with aut in, ut hï aboundz in welth, abundat opibus. Tu frï aut tu deliver, libero; tu relës, relaxo; tu rid, expedio; tu täk, capio sive aufero; tu resëv, recipio; tu exempt, eximo, et hoc sensu fortasse plura, adsciscunt signum of, out of, aut from. Tu deserv, mereor, of; tu akquit aut tu asoil, absolvo, adhibent casui suo of aut from. Tu böst, efferre se; tu brag, iactare; tu glöri aut tu vaunt, glorior, habent in aut of, ut fülz böst in their richez, leud men vaunt of ðeir plëzvrz; stulti in divitiis suis se magnifice efferunt, improbi de voluptatibus gloriantur. Tu ʒoi, laetor, in tantum [M] postulat. Tu withöld, detineo; tu abstaïn, abstineo; tu restrain, retineo; tu difer, disto; tu depart, discedo, denique latina fere omnia quae per a, ab, cum, et reliquis casum sextum regentibus efferuntur, sic etiam anglice construuntur.

Passivam significationem habentia, etiam hanc syntaxeos formam sequuntur cum signis of, for, bj, ut hï waz diliʒentlj tauħt bj mï, sedulo a me docebatur; hj waz blam’d for hiz böldnes, luv’d for hiz wit, ob audacia vituperabatur, propter ingenium amabatur; ðe los of tjm iz much tu bï lamented of al men, boni temporis perditio omnibus multum deflenda est.

 

CAPUT XVII

Casus varius est

 

In verbis appentendi, ut ðe mjnd of a kuvetus man thirsts for, aut after göld, avari animus aurum sitit; ðe thöuħts of a lërned man sïk and serch knöuleʒ, for, aut after knöuleʒ, docti cogitationes quaerunt, et investigant veritatem et scientiam; tu hunt, venor; tu folöu, sequor; tu pursv, persequor; tu kuvet, cupio, accusativum solitarium habent, aut etiam cum signo after; tu dezjr, peto, accusativum tantum. Varius etiam casus est in nomine loci, instrumento, et mesura.

 

Loci nomen

 

Multis signis locum concedit; quies in loco sic: J liv in Lundon, at Lundon, Londini vivo; motus ad locum: J go tu Lundon, towardz Lundon, et nupera phrasi [n. p.] for Lundon, versus Londinum, a. v. pro Londino; a loco: from Lundon, et pro vario sensu, locus est fere omnibus praepositionibus. Sed in inscriptionibus, voces singulae locum suum honeste defendunt, sic: tu mj frind A. B. at hiz hous in Mâlden; amico meo A. B, domi suae in Camuloduno; non in hiz hous at Mâlden; quamvis loci communis nomine ommisso, dicamus: hï iz in hiz hous, intus est.

Instrumentum, materia, modus actionis, causa, pars; post adiectiva, et verba cum praepositionibus ablativum, nonnumquam etiam accusativum regentibus usurpantur. Instrumentum quidem cum with, bj, aut thruħ, ut slain with a swurd, occisus gladio; J withdrv him with, bj, aut thruħ gud kounsel, a. v. cum bono consilio, aut per bonum consilium abduxi eum. Materia ex qua cum of, ut mäd of silver, ex argento factus; in qua cum in aut intu, ut a diamond set in göld, aut intu göld, adamas in auro fixus aut in aurum; circa quam cum in aut about, ut bizied in, aut about mani things, circa multa aut in multis occupatus. Modus actionis cum with construitur aut in, ut hï späk with much ërnestnes, magna cum vehementia locutus est; hï töld mï in sober sadnes, mihi ferio dixit. Hic ablativus saepe in adverbium transit, ut hï späk verj ërnestlj, admodum vehementer locutus est. Causa quidem dicitur cum of, with, for, ut J waz sik of an agv, ex febri laborabam; päl with, aut for anger, pallidus ira. Frequens hic usus est nostri idiomatis; quod coniunctio bikauz, quia ex nomine componitur, genitivum regit more nominum, ut hï iz päl bikauz of his anger, pallidus est ratione irae suae; ad verbum, quia irae suae. Pars denique effertur cum of aut in, ut hï iz läm of hiz handz, pain’d in hiz fït, aut etiam sine praepositione, ut hï iz läm, hand and fut, manibus pedibusque claudus est. [M 2]

Magnitidinis, spatii et temporis mensura, variam admittit constructionem: nam et absoluta videtur, et rectionis. Absoluta, ut quum dicimus, a man of grët äʒ, homo provecta aetate, et an öld man of a hundred and tuenti yërz, senex annos natus centum et viginti; hï undertük a ʒurnei of a thouzand mjl, suscepit iter milliarium 1000; a man of six füt and sevn inchez, vir sex pedum et 7 digitorum. Sed hic videtur eclipsis vocis hjħ, altus, illiic vocis long, longum. Rectionis autem syntaxi quandoque adiectiva, saepius verba, nonnumquam etiam vox consignificativa accusativum suscipit, aut ablativum; idque aut cum praepositione, aut sine ea. Accusativum, ut J hav lived four and fifti yërz, vixi annos 54; a buoi sevn yërz öld, puer annos natus septem; hï käm about midnjħt, venit circiter noctis meridiem. Ablativus etiam quandoque sua signa habet, ut hï käm lät at njħt, aut in ðe njħt, serus venit ad multam noctem; quandoque amittit, ut shï was sik ðis njħt, hac nocte aegrotavit. Differentia autem est in usu casuum, et maxime sine signis positorum: quia accusativus actionis continuitatem significat, ut ðe chjld was sik ten däiz of an ägv, puer totos decem dies laborabat febri; J ʒurneied föur däiz togeðer däi et njħt, dies quatuor continuos iter feci noctuque diuque. Ablativus autem partem temporis innuit, aut intermissionem, aut aliquid insolitum, ut J slept wel tu njħt, aut ðis njħt, hac nocte bene dormivi, i.e. quod aliis non feceram. Neque cum his solis quas diximus praepositionibus casus comitati veniunt, sed alios etiam habent anteambulones; on, upon, et a, pro on, ut J wil go tu church a Sundai, die solis adibo templum; similiter alios, ut a thïf kumz bj njħt not beför sun-set, fur venit noctu, [n. p.] non ante occasum solis. Let super bi redi against six a klok, or bitwïn six and sevn: J wil bï hier again within tü ouerz, bj and bj after six, paretur coena in horam sextam, aut intra sextam et septimam, hic rursus adero infra duas horas, statim post sextam. J kan not dü it under a dai, infra diem non possum perficere. Sic etiam adverbia regunt aut casus solitarios, aut praepositionibus adnexos, ut hï failz not tu kum tu mï öns a dai, non fallit ad me accedere semel in die; ðe agv shük him thrjs in ön dai, febris eum ter in uno die concussit. Haec syntaxis etiam in pondere valet, aut potius in numero; ðis ring waiz thrï dramz, almost ʒïii, about ʒiïj, hic annulus pendit drachmas tres, fere ʒiii, circiter ʒiii, etc., it iz a ring of ʒïii, est annulus trium drachmarum.

 

Notiones communes

 

1. Pro vario sensu, varius etiam casus, tam nominibus quam verbis subiungitur, ut J wil bï ivn with him for az gud a turn, illi par ero aequali beneficio; hï gäv mï ten shilingz in paun upon ðe bargain, at ðe exchanʒ, diverz marchants standing bj; dedit mihi decem solidos pignori in pactum, ad excambium, diversis mercatoribus adstantibus.

2. Nata aliunde regunt casus eorum a quibus derivantur, ut it waz dun profitablj for mï, mihi utiliter factum est: quia profitabl dativum regit, proinde et adverbium exinde natum; sic etiam regunt verbalia, ut yü shal bï tauħt beter manerz, doctus erit meliores mores, quia tu tëch, doceo, accusativum habet. [M 3]

 

CAPUT XVIII

Rectio verbi

 

1. Omnis coniunctio ad cuis praesentiam signa potentialis modi negliguntur, modus nihilominus potentialem regere intellegitur, ut If ðou bïst ðe man ðat J täk ðï for, si tu ille sis quem ego te esse autumo.

2. Deficit aliquando et ipsa coniunctio verbo tamen manente potentiali, ut had a mën man spökn ðez wurdz, no such wizdum had apïred in ðem; si quis homo obscurus haec verba dixisset, tanta in illis sapientia non enituisset. Hic ergo temporis signum locatur ante nominativum: had J dun ðis, si ego hoc fecissem; in indicativo contra: J had dun ðis, ego hoc feceram.

3. Infinitivus et nomina sequitur, et verba. Post verba signum suum tu saepe deferit, ut J kanot understand yü, non possum te intelligere; saepe dixi, quia saepe adsumit, ut bid him wrjt sine signo, at komaund him tu wrjt, sine signo non dicitur. Infinitivus post nomina signum non amittit. Est autem nomen aut substantivum, post quod infinitivus respondet gerundio in di, ut it iz tjm tu strjk whjl ðe jern iz hot, tempus est feriendi dum candet ferrum; aut adiectivum, quod quidem ita regit ut latinum, ut no wuman iz wurðj tu bi luved but for her virtvz, nulla mulier digna est amari nisi propter virtutes.

4. Substantiale verbum tu bï, si ante infinitivum stet solitarium, necessitatem quandam actionis denotat, aut passionis, [n. p.] ut J am tu wrjt, necesse habeo scribere; hï iz tu bï punished for anoðerz wrong, ille puniendus est, aut puniri debet, ob delictum alterius. Si assumat praepositionem about, respondet simpliciter futuro in rus, ut J am about tu wrjt, scripturus sum; aut cum verbali passivo, futuro in dus, ut ðei ar about tu bï turn’d out of dürz, foras quatiendi sunt.

5. Ut elegans, ita latissimus usu est verbalis in ing. Nam praeterquam quod diximus de substantivo cum tempore, etc. post verba motus tu go, eo, aut tu kum, venio, cum praepositione a prioris supini vicem praestat, ut ðei went a hunting, venatum ibant; kum yü heðer a sköulding? huc rixatum venis?

6. Verbale in ing, cum particula az utpote, vel etiam sine ea, ad possessiva sive derivativa personalia relatum; implicitum habet redditiuum qui, quae, vel quod, ut if hï wil dü ani thing at yür komaund, as bïing hiz master; si quid tuo iussu fecerit, utope existens, pro qui existis illius magister. Mj rëding of büks kanot bï grët, spending so much tjm with mj skolârz; mea librorum lectio multa esse non potest, consumens tantum temporis cum discipulis meis, pro, qui consumo.

Verbale in ing, cum articulo a nonnumquam respondet gerundio in dum, ut set it a suning, pone ad insolandum.

 

Notio communis

 

Ubi de vocis alicuius rectione nihil praeceptum est, latinam syntaxim sequere, ut it bihüveth mï, me oportet. [n. p.]

 

De syntaxi schematistica

Lectorem moror aliquantisper

 

Fieri potest (lector) ut multa quae hic de figuris dicturus sum, ab hic nostro instituto aliena diiudices: a rhetoribus tantum adscititia, ut pullum nostrum peregrinis corobus adornem. Scio quidem permagni auctores Ciceronem, Quintilianum, de his uti ad suam provinciam spectantibus statuisse: at si ista suis finibus metiamur, spectabunt magis ad logonomum. Rhetoricae finis est persuadere: ad hoc duobus utitor subsidiis; argumentis videlicet, et (sine qua illa commodum tractari non possunt) exculta oratione. Nulla erit ergo logica quae argumenta invenire, et concludere docet praeter rhetoricam? Non dices. Fatere igitur logonomi esse orationem excolere, ut logici argumentari. Ostendit ergo M. Tullius argumentorum sedes; sed logicam docuit, non rhetoricam: et orationis exortationes ostendit; grammaticus audit, non orator. Fatebor tamen oratori loca esse quaedam unde animorum motus impellat, quae omnium optime, Aristoteles declaravit: et figuras etiam arti suae accommodatus, παράληψιν, ποτπωσιν, συναθροισμόν, commorationem, etc. quae quidem utcunque orationis stilum varient, tamen a communi syntaxeos filo, aut quam hic damus figurata eam nihil immutant. Sed as demus haec ad grammaticum non spectare, spectabunt tamen ad logonomum; imo et ipse totus rhetor, quantuscunque esse potest, logonomiae tamen finibus concludetur. Malui igitur apud alios tanti fieri, ut suplesse velint quod reliqui: quam universam logonomiae γκυκλοπαιδεαν profiteri. Et quia neminem eloquentiae iudicem satis idoneum adhibeo, qui in vocum significatione haesurus est: noli amplius latinam interpretationem a me expetere, qua si conarer vix assequi possem, sermonis certe nostris venustatem ita inconcinne tegerem, ut nullam postea veniam ab anglicis auribus impetrarem. Nam quantum latinorum hominum industria greacos in hoc studii genere vicit; tantum latinam supellectilem, reliquamque (existimo) omnem, ornatus anglicus superavit. Nic scribitur anglice, nec dicitur sine figura. Sed ut in caelo clariora sunt lumina quam quae oculi ferant, et obscura adeo ut visum vix feriant; sic et apud nos sunt metaplasmi, eclipses, aliae, quas aures nonnisi perpurgatissimae diiudicant; sunt tamen quae illas ita leniunt, ut deliniant; ita sensum capiunt, ut animum rapiant. Et quia aliquis ista fortasse legat qui iam diu ferulae manum subduxit, addam definitiones, quas olim memoriae sublevandae causa, discipulis meis, partim ex Mancinello, Despauterio, aut aliunde collegi; partim ipse perstrinxi numeris: quae si displiceant, cuique [n. p.] erit integrum meliora substituere. Exempla fere omnia e spenceri poemate desumuntur, cui titulus Đe Fäeri Quïn.

 

CAPUT XIX

Ad rem redeo

 

Orationis σχῆμα sive ornatus ille quo a vulgata differt, aut in delectu verborum est, aut in usu. In delectu tropus est, quia dictio aliqua a propria significatione ad aliam vertitur. Tropus alias vocetur Σθωεκδοχὴ, id est conception, sive intellectio: aut similia a simili, quae Μεταφοπὰ sive translatio est: aut contrarii a contrario, ironia dicta: aut tertio cum causa, subiectum, totum; ab effectu, adiuncto, parte intelligitur; aut econtra: hinc Μετωνυμιὰ sive transnominatio est. Sed ne in haeresin grammaticam abeamus, dicamus cum vulgo totius aut partis metonymian esse proprie dictam synecdochen: sic tropi erunt primarii quatuor, cum suis appendicibus. Tropus omnis verecundus esse debet, non nimium detortus; nam si durior videatur Κατάχρησις, sive abusio dicetur; si audacior hyperbole; si humilior, liptote, Μείωσις, sive Ταπείνωσις. Haec aliis schemata, mihi potius schematum videntur affectiones.

 

Dura catachresis dicetur abusio vocis, ut

But ah whü kan desëv hiz destinj?

desëv] fallere, profugere. Et paulo post.

So tikl bï ðe termz of mortâl stät,  

And ful of sutl sofizms which du plai 

With dubl sensez, and with fâls debät .

debät] contentionem dixit pro ratiocinatione, quia debät significat simultates, nisi καταχρηστικῶς. [N]

 

Transcensus veri manifestus hyperbola fiet.

Đe wâlz wër hj, but nothing strong, nor thik; 

And göldn süil âl over ðem displäid: 

Đat pvrest skj with brjħtnes ðëi dismäid .

 

With hideus horror both togëðer smjt, 

And sons so sör, ðat ðei ðe hevnz afrai .

 

Si verum extenues verbis μείωσις habetur.

So bï yür gudlihed, du not disdäin 

Đe bäs kindred of so simpl swäin 

du not disdain] noli habere contemptui, i.e. boni consule.

Mï âl tü mën, ðe säkred mvz arëdz,

Et in praefatione in libro 3 totus est in extenuatione sui.

Hou shal J ðen aprentis of ðat skil?

aprentis] tyronem se dicit magnus magister.

 

A sensu simili sumptum translatio verbum est.

But nou wëk äʒ had dim’d hiz kandl ljħt.

Hï ðertu mïting said , pro answering obuians, pro respondens.

J shal yü wel reward tu sheu ðe pläs, 

In which ðat wiked wjħt hiz däiz duth wër .

wër] terit pro consumit.

 

Nec te pigeat a Iuvenali nostro Georgio Wiðerz, ubi satyrae asperitatem seposuit frequentem audire metaphoram.

Fäier, bj natvr bïing born,

Boröu’d beuti shï duth skorn.

Hï ðat kiseth her, nïd fër

No unhölsum vernish ðer:

For from ðens, hï onlj sips

Đe pvr Nektar of her lips:

And with ðez, at öns hï klözez [n. p.]

Melting rvbiz; cheriz, rözez.

 

Ab hoc fonte sunt allegoriae omnes, et comparationes, Παροιμίαι etiam pleraeque et Αινίγματα. Allegoria enim nihil aliud est, quam continuata metaphora. In hac frequens est Lucanus noster Samuel Daniel. Delia, sonet 31.

 

Räzing mj höps on hilz of hjħ dezjr,

 Thinking tu skäl ðe hëvn of hir hart,

 Mj slender mënz prezvm’d tü hj a part.

 Her thunder of disdain forst mï retjr,

And thrv mï doun, etc.

 Hvʒ së of soröu, and tempesteus grïf, 

 Whërin mj fïbl bark iz tosed long,

 Far from ðe höped hävn of relïf:

 Whj du ðj krvel bilöz bët so strong,

 And ðj moist mountainz ëch on oðer throng,

 Thrëting tu swalöu up mj fërful ljf?

 O du ðj krvel wrath and spjtful wrong

 At length alai, and stint ðj stormi strjf,

Which in ðëz trubled bouelz rainz and räʒeth rjf.

 For els mj fïbl vesel, kräz’d and kräkt,

Kanot endvr , etc.

 

Sed et totum Spenseri poema allegoria est, qua ethicen fabulis edocet. Sic allegoria rem totam per metaphoram obscure tractat: paroimia et aenigma multo obscurius; comparatio dilucidius, quia primo metaforam explicat, postea cum re componit.

 

Az when tü ramz, stird with ambisius prjd:

 Fjħt for ðe rvl of ðe fair flïsed flok;

 Đeir horned fronts so fërs on eiðer sjd 

Du mït, ðat with ðe teror of ðe shok,

 Astonied both stand sensles as a blok,

 Forgetful of ðe hanging viktorj:

 So stüd ðëz twain in unmüved az a rok , etc. [N 2]

 

A sensu proprio ludit contrarius ιρων.

 

Praiz of an hjħ rekning, an a trik tu bï grëtlï renouned 

Yü with yür priket purchast. Lo ðe victori fämus, 

With tü godz paking on wumman silli tu kuzn. 

 

Commune defunctorum totum est in ironia, ut et illud Philippi Sidnei, in ingeniosissimo illo Arcadiae poemate, nisi quod versibus scriptum non est.

 

Ljk grët god Säturn fair, et ljk fair Venus chäst, etc.

 

Ad ironiam sive sarcasmum referuntur antifrasis, insultatio, Παράληψις, asteismos, et omnia illa in quibus sermo, a rei ipsius veritate dissentit.

Antiphrasis vox est signans contraria dicto . 

Tu tel mj försez machabl tu nön, 

Wër but lost läbor ðat feu wüld bilïv. 

machabl tu nön] nullis pares, i.e. quibus nullae pares erant.

 

Subiecti adiunctum si signes nomine, vel si pro causa effectum supponas, aut vice versa; ista Μετωνυμιὰν faciet conversio vocum.

Đen shal J yü rekount a rvful käs

(Said hï) ðe which with ðis unluki ei 

J lät bïheld; and had not grëter gräs

Mï rest from it, had bïn partäker of ðe pläs. 

unluki ei] infausto oculo, i.e. rei infaustae teste, sic ðe pläs] locum dixit, rei adiunctum, pro re ipsa.

But after âl yür war, now rest yür wëri knjf . 

sicam defessam nominat, pro defesso bellatore.

For ðj, shï gäv him warning everi däi, 

Đe luv of wimen not tu entertain; [n. p.]

A lesn tü tu hard for living kläi 

living klai] causa pro effectu posita; quia homo ab humo factus est.

Huc refer antonomasiam, metalepsin, et onomatopoeiam; atque etiam, si digna sit, barbaralexin. Spero hic definitionibus opus non esse: sed ne spem tuam fallam, habes ex Mancinello.

 

Antonomasia est sumptum pro nomine nomen.

Ne let hiz fäirest Sinthia refvz,

 In mirors mör ðen ön her self tu sï: 

But eiðer Gloriana let hir chvz, 

 Or in Belfëbe fashioned tu bï:

In ð’ön her rvl, in ð’oðer her rär chastitï. 

 

Nominis ex alio transumptio fit Μετάληψις.

But fäir Karisa tu a luvlj fër,

Waz linked, and bj him had manj pleʒez dër.  

pleʒez] pignora, id est amoris, pro liberis.

For tu Dhï iz unknöun ðe krädl of ðj brüd. 

krädl of ðj brüd] incunabula ortus tui, pro parentibus.

 

Finge novas voce, onomatopoeia fiet.

And mör tu lul him in his slumber soft, etc.

Sequitur ibidem: murmuring wjnd, Hï mumbled soft. 

et si haec placent lege Stanihursti Liparem, ex libro 8 AEneidos Virgilii.

 

De barbaralexi, ferme haero quid sim scripturus. Nam si in furta eorum invehar qui e lingua latina, gallica, et ut categorice dicam quavis alia, magnam faciunt in re tenui, sapientiae et doctrinae speciem, quum verbum unum aut alterum non antea auditum cudere possunt; grammaticaster allatror: si facundiam eorum, et ingenium collaudem, vereor ne maoiribus meis, qui nil tale fecerunt, [N 3] nil tale cogitarunt, barbariei notam inuram, et quam linguam eorum suavitatis, et copiae laudibus extollo; ut horridam, ut incultam, et inopem vituperem. Quare ut de novo hoc verborum aucupio nihil ipse afferam; afferam quae clarissimi oratores censuerunt, qui romanam eloquentia et praeceptis, et exemplis illustrarunt. Sic igitur Marcus Tullius Cicero de Officiis, liber 1, sermone eo debemus uti, qui notus est nobis: ne ut quidam graeca verba inculcantes, iure optimo irrideamur. Idem voluit eruditissimus Quintilianus liber 1, caput 6. Utendum plane sermone ut nummo, cui publica forma est. Et paulo post. Oratio vero cuius summa virtus est perspicuitas, quam sit vitiosa si egeat interprete? Verborum autem delectum hunc laudat. Verba, a vetustate repetita, afferunt orationi maiestatem non sine delectatione. Nam et auctoritatem antiquitatis habent; et, quia intermissa, gratiam novitati similem parant. Quod si verum est, etiam et obsoleta illa quae videntur, of yör et Febus welked in ðe west, Hï wexed wud and yond, et caetera his similia, gratiam aliquando impetrabunt: surreptitius autem ille foetus, pondering, perpending, and revolüting, semper haerebit in barbaralexi.

 

Pro toto pars est, pro parte synecdocha totum.

Đou tu redïm ði wöful parents hëd, 

Hast wandred thruħ ðe world nou long a däi:

 Yit sësest not ðj wëri sölz tu lëd.

But dün ðj fïbl fït unwïting hiðer sträi? 

hëd] pro vita, et illa pro libertate transumpta μετάληψις est.

a dai] dies, synecdoche partis est pro toto i.e. tempore. Ita

sölz] plantae pro pedibus, et fït pedes, pro integra persona.

Him Kalidör ðus kari’d on hiz chjn. 

chjn] spina dorsi pro dorso ponitur.

 

CAPUT XX

De figuris syntaxeos

 

Sic fuit tropus in vocum delectu: sequitur in usu figura. Figura aut in unica tantum voce spectatur, aut in [n. p.] sententia. In voce spectatur sonus, aut (quatenus a vulgata differt) syntaxis. In syntaxi est vocis alicuius, aut forte clausulae, defectus, redundantia, enallage: sed haec vocis tantum est. Defectum indicat, 1. eclipsis, 2. articulus, 3. aposiopesis, 4. zeugma, 5. syllepsis.

 

1. Clausula si desit, vel vox, dicatur eclipsis.

So of hï did hiz shïld, and dounward laid 

 Vpon ðe ground, ljk tu a holöu bër .

post laid deficit particula it.

Đe garland from hiz hed hï sün displäst, 

And did it put on Koridons in stëd. deest

  of his öun. 

 

2. Cum sine iunctura voces variae sociantur, articulum certe, vel Ασύνδετον effeciemus. 

Yür eiz, yür ërz, yür tung, yür tâlk resträin. 

From ðat ðëi möst affekt, and in dv tërmz retäin.

 

For what hath ljf, ðat mai it luved mäk? 

 And givz not räðer kauz it dailj tu forsäk?

 Fër, siknes, äʒ, los, läbor, soröu, strjf,

 Pain, hunger, köld, ðat mäks ðe hart tu quäk;

 And ever fikl fortvn raʒing rjf:

Ael which, and thouzandz mo, dü mak a lothsum ljf. 

 

Αποσιώπησις, reticentia, praecisio, interruptio

3.  Sermo praecisus subito, reticentia dicta est.

In prinses kürt. ðe rest sï wüld hav said,  

But ðat ðe fülish man, etc. 

 

 Sï held hir wrathful hand from venʒans för. [n. p.]

 But drâing nër, ër hï hir wel beheld:

 Iz ðis ðe faith (shï said?) and said no mör,

But turn’d hir fast, and fled awai for evermör. 

 

Ζεῦγμα, adiunctio.

4.  Verbo uno plures sensus per zeugma recludo. 

 But, neiðer darknes foul, nor filthi bandz, 

 Nor noius smel, hiz purpöz küld withhöld. 

 

 And hï hiz fäz, hiz hed, hiz brest did bët .  

 

Σύλληψις, collectio, conceptio

5. Syllepsin faciet vox ad diversa relata.

Differt a zeugmate, quod ibi nulla vocis mutatio requitur: hic autem vox quae cum proxime praecedenti cohaeret, ad aliam sententiae clausulam relata, mutanda est. Itaque in omni syllepsi zeugma est, non econtra, ut neiðer hï, nor yü, ar äbl tu mäk mï amendz. Verbum ar ad alium nominativum relatum mutuatur in iz; neiðer yü, nor hï iz äbl, etc. Nam verbum, licet ad duos nominativos diversarum personarum relatum, tamen cum proxime praecedenti cohaerebit.

Omnium figurarum quae redundantiam indicant genus est 1. pleonasmus; cuius praecipuae species sunt, 2. macrologia sive Περισσολογία; 3. Σθνωνθμία; 4. Επίθετον; 5. σχῆσις; 6. Περίφρασις; 7. hendyalismus; 8. Πολυσύνδετον.

 

1. Esto pleonasumus, si quid sermone redundet.

Đei häv throuħ mani batails fouħt in pläs, 

Hjħ rër’d ðeir roial thrön in Britain land .

in pläs redundat. Strâ mï ðe ground with dafadoundiliz.

Hinc nominee potius quam re differunt . [n. p.]   

 

2. Macrologia sive perissologia, et 3. synonymia.

And vanquisht ðem unäbl tu withstand,

ultima cluasula περισσέυει, ut et alibi.

Hï folöued and pursved fast, folöued fast, and pursved fast, sensu non differunt magis, quam διώκω, et persequor.

Μακπρολογίας exemplum habes:

But noius smel hiz purpöz küld not höuld, 

But ðat with konstant zël, and kouraʒ böuld, 

After long painz, and läbors maniföuld;

Hï found ðe mënz ðat prizner up tu rër.  

with konstant, etc., usque ad manifould, ad sensum non necessario adduntur.

 

3. Verba synonimia nova rem dant prorsus eandem.

 Wï met ðat vilan, ðat vjl miskreant, 

Đat kursed wjħt, from whöm J skäpt whjl-ër,

 A man of hel, ðat kâlz himself Despair. 

 

Επίθετον, appositum, attributum.

4. Dicitur appositum fixo bene mobile quadrans.

But wjz Speranza gäv him kumfort swït.

Haec figura nihil aliud est quam adiectivum cum substantivo; usque adeo stulte repuerascunt logonomi. At si in eadem periodo frequens sit; 5. Schesis dicitur, et orationem exornat. 

 

Nominibus cunctis si fingis epitheton unquam, fit schesis; aut uni si forsan plurima iungas.

Much gan ðei präiz ðe trïz so straiħt and hj, 

Đe sailing pjn, ðe Sëdar proud and tâl,

Đe vjn-prop elm, ðe poplar never drj,

Đe bïlder ök, söl king of forests âl, [O]

Đe aspin gud for stävz, ðe sjpres fvneral, etc. 

 Ful mani mischïfs folou krvel wrath; 

 Abhored blud-shed, and tvmultvus strjf,

 Unmanli murðer, and unthrifti skath,

 Biter dispjt, with rankerus rusti knjf,

 Đe sweling splïn, and frenzi raʒing rjf, etc. 

 

Περίφρασις, circuitus, circuitio, circumloquutio.

6. Rem circumloquitur per plura Περίφρασις unam . 

  Hï ða ðe blud-red bilöuz, ljk a wâl, 

  On eiðer sjd disparted with hiz rod;

  Til âl hiz armj drj-füt thruħ ðem yod. 

id est Möses. Hunc afferuntur omnes descriptiones locorum, personarum, temporum, etc. quibus omne poema scatet; quae si placet habe ex eodem Farnabeio.

 

a Res, b loca, c personas, d affectis, e tempora gesta: f characterismus dicucidat, explicat, ornat.

 Quae quidem apud logonomos hace nomina sortita sunt. a Pragmatografia, b topografia aut topothesia, c prosopografia, d pathografia, e chronografia, f qui etiam hypotyposis dicitur aut enargia, de quibus si ulterius quaerere libet, vide susenbrotum et alios. Est chronografiae exemplum.

Nou, when ðe rozi-fingred morning faier 

Wëri of aʒed Tjthönz safern bed,

Had spred her purpl röb thruħ deui aier,

And ðe hjħ hilz Titan diskuvered. 

id est ad exortum solis.

 

7. Mobile fac fixum fiest sic hendyalismus.

Đo waxing wëri of ðat tüil and pain, 

id est, painful tüil. [n. p.]

Prins Artur gäv a box of diamond svr,

Embou’d with göld, and gorʒeus ornament. 

id est, with gold gorʒeusly adorned, or set out.

 

8. Polysyndeton, sive ut placet despauterio polysyntheton, sic illi definitur.

Copula multiplicata facit polysyntheton usque, sed multo melius amantissimus nostri Farnabeius. Coniunctura frequens vocum polysyndeton esto.

--- Ael on konfvzed hëps ðei throng, 

And snach, and bjt, and tug, and rend and tër. 

 

Tu whom fäir semblans (as hï küld) hï sheud: 

 Bj sjnz, bj lüks, bj âl hiz oðer ʒësts. 

 

Εναλλαγὴ, Αλλοιώθετα, Αλλοίωσις, alternatio. Haec si in casibus fiat Αντίπθωσις dicitur; si in numero σύνθεσις: apud nos, ulla vocis pro voce positio enallage dicitur. 

Dicta alloiösis vox est pro voce reposta.

Hï röuz’d himself ful bljð, and hästned ðem until, 

pro untu, quamvis apud boreales haec nulla est enallage.

faint-hart fülz pro faint-harted. of nothing täks hï kïp pro kär.

 Đei fled from pläs tu pläs with kouherd shäm,

So ðat with fjnal förs, ðem âl hï overkäm.

kouherd pro kouherdlj, aut kouherdljk; et fjnal pro finalj. Sed haec enallage poeticam etiam syntaxim requirit, quam vulgaris non admittit. Soluta enim oraio sic est: so ðat fjnalj, hï overkäm ðem âl with, aut bj förs. Nec solis est in usu poetis enallage, sed et prorsa scriptoribus, et in foro baiulis, ut mï thöuħt it shüld bï yü, [O 2] and so mï thinks, ubi accusativum , pro nominativo est, et tertia persona thinks pro prima.

 

CAPUT XXI

De figuris in sono

 

Pervenimus ad figuras, quae in voce sunt ratione soni: vox autem similis est, aut eadem: ideque aut significatu, aut sono tantum. Eadem significatu, aut sola resumitur; aut cum Εξεγήσει, sive interpretatione. Si sola, aut in principio frequens est, idque continue in 1. Επιζεύξει: aut disiuncte, haec 2. Αναφορὰ dicitur: aut in fine, quae 3. Επιστροφὴ: aut utrobique, et est 4. Επανάληψις. In fine item praecedentis clausulae, et initio sequentis 5. Αναδίπλωσις est: hic si rerum etiam incrementum sit, 6. Κλίμαξ est. Frequentata porro anafora cum epistrofe 7. Συμπλοκὴν faciunt. Porro si vox eadem cum explicatione resumatur 8. Εξήγησις dicitur aut Ενάργια. At si vox eadem sono tantum sit, at significatione dssissimili, 9. Copulatio dicitur: si dispari 10. Αντανάκλασις. Denique similes voces aut ab uno sunt themate, in quibus est 11. Πολυπτῶτον, et traductio: aut a diverso, ubi 12. Παρονομασία et 13. Ομοιοτέλευτον.

 

 

Επίζεyξις, sive subjunctio.

1. Unam si gemines vocem subjunctio fiet.

ðe lädi sad tu sï hiz sör konstraint, 

Krj’d out, Nou nou sir Knjħt sheu what yü bï . 

 

 Horöu nou out and wel awai hï krj’d, 

 Pirökles, ô Pirökles! what iz ði bitj’d [n. p.]

 J burn, J burn, J burn, hï krj’d aloud,

 O hou J bürn with impläkabl fjer? 

 

Repetitio, Αναφορὰ, sive Επαναφορὰ.

2. Saepius appositum capiti repetitio verbum est.

 Sum fëring shrïkt, sum bïng harmed houl’d

 Sum lauħt for sport, sum did for wunder shout 

And sum ðat wüld sïm wjz ðeir wunder turnd tu dout. 

 

Conversio, Αντιστροφὴ aliis Επιστροφὴ.

3. Pluria membra pro sono conversio claudit eodem.

For truth iz ön, and rjħt iz ever ön. 

 

Et quamvis poesis anglica in sonos similes exeat, non voces easdem: accipe tamen, ex Harringtono lepidissimo nostro Martiali legitimum conversionis exemplum. Epigrammaton, liber 3.

Konserning wjvz höuld ðis a ssertain rvl,

ðat if at first yü let ðem häv ðe rvl,

Yür self at last with ðem shal hav no rvl,

Eksept yü let ðem ever-mör tu rvl. 

 

Επανάληψις

4. Incipit et finit verbo epanalepsis eodem.  

Böuld waz hiz chälenʒ, äz himself waz böuld . 

Shäm bï hiz wurði mïd ðat mëneth shäm.   

Et nisi displiceat audi etiam epilogum crassissima cute poetae.

For yür päsiens wï thank yï;

Wï hav no mör tu sai, wï.

 

Αναδίπλωσις, reduplicatio.

5. Est anadiplosis quoties ex fine prioris membri, principium fit dictio prima sequentis.

Exemplum sit utriusque figurae.

O tu dier luv! luv böuħt with dëth tu dier. 

Đei for ðe luv of him wüld algat dj . [O 3]

Dj whü so list for him, hï waz luvz enemj, 

 But of âl wizdum bï ðou prezident,

O soverain Quïn! whüz praiz J wüld endjt,

 Endjt J wvld az duti duth eksjt, etc. 

sed longe pulcherrimum exemplum est illud nobilissimi dieri.

J lük for no relïf, relïf wüld kum tü lät,

Tü lät J fjnd, J fjnd tü wel, tü wel stüd mjn estat.

 

Porro frequens anadiplosis, si rerum etiam incrementum accedat κλίμαξ dicitur, sive gradatio.

6. Crebra anadiplosis rerum est cum pondere Κλίμαξ.

--- Doun on ðe bludi plain 

 Her-self shï t thrv, and tërz gan shed amain, 

Amongst her tërz immixing praiers mïk,

 And with her praierz, rëznz tu restrain

From bludi strjf  ---

Habes etiam apud Sidneium Anacreonta nostrum exemplum, Arcadiae, liber 3, cantus 1.

--- --- Rëzn tu mi passion ïlded,

 Passion untu mi räʒ, räʒ tu a hasti revenʒ.

Neglecta tamen anadiplosi frequens est gradatio; quam tamen alii Αύξησις malunt, aut incrementum nominari. Arcadiae, liber 1, cantus 2. At length from hiz silent melankoli, hï grv kontent tu mark ðeir wit, after tu ljk ðeir kumpanj, and lastli tu vouchsäf konferens.

Of grjzli Pluto shï ðe dauħter waz, 

And sad Proserpina ðe quïn of hel 

Yet shï did think her pïerle s wurth tu pas

ðat parentaʒ, with prjd shï so did swel:

And thundring ʒöv ðat hjħ in hevn duth dwel,

And wïld ðe world shï klaimed for her sjr; [n. p.]

Or if ðat ani els did ʒöv eksel;

For tu ðë hjest shï did stil aspjr;

Or if öuħt hjer wër ðen ðat, did it dëzjr. 

 

Complexio Συμπλοκὴ.

7. Dat caput, atque pedes similes complexio membris.

Haec figura etiam apud poetas rara est, quia ad rythmum non easdem (ut supra dixi) sed similes sonos adhibent. Accipe tamen e Spensero. Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 8.

Hï ʒentlj ask’t , whër â1 ðe pïpl bï,

Which in ðat stätli bïlding wunt tu dwel?

Whü answerëd him ful soft, Hï küld not tel.

Hï ask’t again, whër ðat säm Knjħt waz laid,

Whöm grët Orgolio with pvisans fel 

Had mäd hiz kaitiv thral? again hï said,

Hï küld not tel. Hï asked ðen, which wai

Hï in mjħt pas? Ignäro küld not tel.

Saepe fit, ut prius dictum per εξήγησις resumatur, aut etiam πεξήγησις. Haec figura Ενάργια dicitur et interpretatio sive expositio.

 

8. Explicat obscuramque resumit Ενάργια vocem.

At last ðe painim chaunst tu kast hiz ei,  

Hiz sudain ei, upon hiz broðers shïld .

Hiz dïerest Lädi dëd with fër hï found. 

Her siming dëd hï found, with fained fër. 

But hï her supliant handz, döz handz of göld; 

 And ïk her fït, döz fït of silver trj

 Which söuħt unrjħhteusnes, and ʒustis söld

Chopt of, and naild on hjħ, ðat âl mjħt ðem bihöld. 

 

Copulatio, sive duplicatio.

9. Dissimili sensu dictum, copulatio fertur.

Suït Lädi, yü must swët, or elz (J swër it) [n. p.] 

Wï shal âl swët for it, if yü forbër it. 

swët priori loco significat sudare, idque sensu proprio; posteriori metaphorice significat labores aut molestias pati, quas perferunt sudantes et liber 2, epigramma 96.

 Tu präiz mj wjf yür dauħter (so J gaðer)

Yür men sai shï resembleth möst hir faðer.

And J no les tu praiz yür sun hir bruðer,

 Affirm ðat hï iz tü much ljk hiz muðer.

J knöu not if wï ʒuʒ arjħit or er, 

 But let him bï ljk yü, so J ljk her.

 

Αντανάκλασισ.

10. Una sono, est, sensu dispar, vox, antanaclasis.

 Markus në’r sëst tu venter âl on prjm, 

Til of hiz aʒ qujt wästed waz ðe prjm. 

J kâld ðï öns mj dïerest Mal in vers.

Which ðus J kan interpret if J wil,

Mj dïerest Mal, ðat iz mj kostliest il. 

Mal priori loco fictitium est pro Mariâ, altero gallicum mutatum a malo. Hae duae figurae epigrammatum scriptoribus ut frequentes sunt, ita aliquando implicitae, nempe cum unico vocabulo sensus terque intelligitur, hanc copulationem habes. Liber 1, epigramma 50.

Lädiz yü bläm’d mj versez of skuriliti,

 Whjl with ðe dubl sens yü wër dësëved

Nou yü konfes ðem frï from insiviliti;

 Täk hïd hens-förth yü bï not miskonsëved.

miskonsëved, aut animo sensum falsum, aut utero partum spurium concipere significat. Huiusmodi antanaclasis est Iohannis Dauisii Heref.

Moecho, for häst, waz maried in ðe njħt;

Wha t nïded däi? hiz fäir yung Brjd waz ljħt. [n. p.]

 

10 Per varios casus, varia aut discrimina vocum, esto polyptoton, dicta aut traductio bella est.

Haec figura in variis tantum casibus est polyptoton: proinde multo apud Marcum Tullium, Cornificium, seu quemvis alium, traductio dicitur, quia hic ornatus non in casibus solum spectatur, sed et in omni orationis parte ab eodem themate derivata .

   

And häving pläs’t my thouħts, mj thouħts ðus pläsed

Mï thouħt, nai svr J waz, Jwaz in fäirest Wud mï,

Of Samothéa land, a land ðat whjlum stüd

An onor tu ðe world, whjl onor waz ðeir end. 

 And ïk ðe Red-kros Knjħt gav her gud aid 

 Ai ʒoining füt tu füt, and sjd tu sjd. 

--- --- --- Nou mai yï âl sï plain, 

 ðay truth iz strong, and trv luv möst of mjħt,

 ðat for hiz trusti servants duth so strongli fjħt  .

 

Agnominatio, Παρονομασία, Παρήχῆσις, Παρηχία, sive adsonantia.

11. Adsonat in simili lusura Παρηχία voce.

So wel shï washt ðem, and so wel shï wacht him .

 Fj but a man’s disgräst, nöted a novis. 

Yë but a man’s mör gräs’t nöted of no vjs.

 ðe mïd of ðem ðat luv, and du not liv amis .

 

12. Verborum similis fit finis Ομοιοτέλευτον . 

hoc fere tota poesis nostra ornata est, adeo ut exemplis non sit opus. [P]

 

CAPUT XXII

De figuris sententiae

 

Figurae quae in voce, tales fuerunt: sequuntur illae quae sunt sententiae. In sententia habetur ratio ordinis vocum, et sensu. Ordo aut unus est et continuus in 1. hirmo; aut obscurus in 2. synchesi; aut turbatus in 3. hyperbato; et 4. parenthesi. Sensus porro aut incitatus est; ubi 5. exclamatio, et epiphonema; aut emendatus in 6. epanorthosi; aut explicatus, in 7. antitheto, 8. inversione, 9. subiectione, et 10. epanodo; aut contractus, in 11. congerie.

 

Hirmos sive Συρμὸς.

1. Sermonis series una et praelonga sit hirmos.

I mj frail eiz ðëz ljnz with tërz du stïp 

Tu think hou shï, thruħ gjlful handling,

Đoħ trv az tuch, ðoħ dauħter of a King,

Đoħ fäir az ever liuing wjħt waz fair,

Đoħ not in word nor dïd il meriting,

Iz from her Knjħt divorsed in dispair, etc .

Fresh shadöuz, fit tu shroud from suni rai; 

Fair laundz, tu täk ðe sun in sëzn dv;

Swït springz, in which a thouzand nimfs did plai;

Soft rumblirg brüks, ðat ʒentl slumber drv;

Hjh rëred mounts, ðe landz about tu vv;

Löu lüking dälz, disloin’d from komon gäz;

Deljtful bourz, tu solas luvers trv;

Fair laberinths, fond runerz eiz tu däz: [n. p.]

Ael which bj nätvr mäd, did nätvr self amäz.

And âl without, etc .

 

Σύνχεσις

2. Confundit voces, et sensum synchesis omnem.

Đjn ô (ðen said ðe ʒentl Redkros Knjħt) 

Next tu ðat Lädjz luv shal bï ðe pläs,

0 fairest virʒin ful of hevnli ljħt .

Quae si in ordinem redigas sic habebunt. Đen said ðe Redkros Knjħt, O fairest virʒin ful of hevnli ljħt, ðe next pläs tu ðat Lädiz luv shal bï ðjn. Ubi etiam ὑπαλλαγὴ est, sensus enim sic se dat. Đe next pläs tu ðj luv shal bï ðat Lädiz, id enim postulat divina lex, ut primo sacrosanctam veritatem diligamus, secundo loco principes honoremus.

Grët thanks and gudli mïd tu ðat gud Sjr, 

Hï ðens departing, gäv for hiz painz hjr .

Hoc est, hï departing ðens, gäv tu ðat gud Sjr, grët thanks, ðe gudli mïd, and hjr for his painz.

 

Υπέρβατον, transgressio

3. Vocum turbatus formabit hyperbaton ordo .  

huic quasi duce militare videntur Αναστροφὴ, sive reversio; Υστερολογία, Υστερον πρώτερον, in quibus ita exiguum discessere argutatores logonomi, ut non verear confundere. Exempla passim occurrunt, ut Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 5.

Whj fërest ðou, ðat kanst not höp for thing,

 And fërest not ðat mör ðï hurten mjħt? 

Whj fërest ðou ðe thing ðat ðou kanst not höp for;

And fërest not ðat which mjħt hurt ðï mör?

 Whü sï yür vanquisht föz bïför yü lj. 

Whü sï yür föz lj vanquisht beför yü . [P 2]

 

His cognata est παλλαγὴ, submutatio, sive subalternatio. 

Si rerum sensus commutes ordine verso: fiest hypallaga, nobis submutation dicta est.

Đe god did graunt hiz dauħters dïer demaund .  

pro, demaund of hiz dïer dauħter.

And nou ðei dü with kaptiv bands him bjnd. 

 

Παρένθεσις, interpositio, Διάλυις, sive dissolutio.

4. Sermoni interiectus sermo, parenthesis extat.

Donwallo dj’d (for what mai liv for äi?) 

And left tü sunz of pierles proues both .

 

Εκφώνησις, exclamatio

5. Ιndicat ingentes animi exclamatio motus.

--- Mersi, mersi (Sir) voutsäf tu sheu 

On sili däm subʒekt tu hard mischans .

--- Flj, ah flj far hens awai for fër.

O trustles stät of ërthlj thingz, and sliper höp 

Of mortâl men ðat swink and swët for nouħt!

Huic affine est Επιφώνημα, sive acclamatio, ut sequitur ibidem.

Unwjz and witles men tu wit what’s gud or il.

 Wï dïm of dëth az düm of il dezert:

But knv wï öns what gud it bringz us til,

Dj wüld wï dailj, öns it tu expert .

 Đis said, adoun hï lüked tu ðe ground 

Tu häv return’d; but däzed wër hiz ein

 Throuħ pasing brjħtnes which did qujt konfound

Hiz fïbl sens, and tü eksïding shjn.

So dark är thingz on ërth kompär’d tu thingz divjn .

 

Επανόρθωσις, aut correctio, Μετάνοια, reprehensio, Αφορισμὸς, et Παραδιαστολὴ, id est, disiunctio sive determinatio. [n. p.]

6. Dicta Epanorthosis negat, et magis apta reponit.

Let dirʒ bï sung, and trentalz rjħtli red;

For luv iz ded, etc.

Alas J lj, räʒ hath ðis error bred,

luv iz not ded.

 Luv iz not dëd but slïpeth, etc.

So waz hï overkum, not overkum, 

 But tu her yïlded of hiz öun akord .

 J wreched wuman, nou yür kaitiv thrâl 

Waz, ô what availeth what J waz?

Born ðe söl dauħter of an Emperour. 

 

Αντίθεσις, Αντίθετα, Εναντίωσις, contrarium, contentio.

7. Antitheton fiet quoties contraria nectis. 

 Hensfürth in säf asvrans yï mai rest, 

Having both 1 found a 2 nv 3 frind tu yür 4 aid,

And 1 lost an 2 öld 3 fö ðat did yü 4 molest. 

At öns hï wardz and strjks, hï täks and päiz, 

Nöu först tu yïld, nou försing tu inväd,

Biför, bihjnd, and round about him läiz,

So dubl waz hiz painz, so dubl bï hiz präiz. 

 

Αντιμεταβολὴ, commutatio, nobis inversio.

8. Verba inversa dabit, versosque, inversio sensus.

Hï fljing stil did ward, and warding flj awai. 

It sïmd ðe wävz wër intu ivorj,

 Or ivorj in tu ðe wävz waz sent. 

 Withâl shï lauħed, and shï blusht withâl: 

 Đat blushing tu her lauħter gäv mör gräs,

 And lauħing tu her blushing. --- ---

 

Subiectio

9. Quum respondemus nobis subiectio fiet. [P 3]

And iz ðer kär in hëvn? and iz ðer luv 

 In hëvnlj spirits tu ðëz krëtvrz bäs,

 Đat mai kompasion of ðeir ïvlz müv?

 Đer iz. elz much mör wreched, etc .

But if tu luv disloialtj it bï, 

Shal J ðen hät her ða t from dëthez dör

Mï brouħt? ah far bï such repröch from mï,

What kan J les dü ðen her luv ðërför .

 Diskurteus, disloiâl Britomart, 

 What venʒans dv kan equal ðj dezart,

Đat hast with shämful spot of sinful lust,

Defjld ðe pleʒ komited tu ðj trust?

Let uglj shäm and endles infamj

Kuler ðj näm with foul repröchez rust .

Huc spectat Ανακοίνωσις, et omnes illae sermocinationes, quae per inquam, et inquit explicari possunt.

Whër dwelz Mr. Kärles? ʒësterz hav no dweling.

 Whër ljz hï? in hiz tung bj möst menz teling.

Whër bördz hï? ðer whër fësts är found bj smeling.

Whër bjts hï? âl behjnd, gainst âl men yëling .

 

Επάνοδος, regressio.

10. Quum semel in toto totum proponis, et inde, dividis in partes; regressio dicitur esse.

Of ðöz hï chöz out tü, ðe fâlsest tü, 

And fitest for tu forʒ trv-sïming ljz:

Đe ön of ðem hï gäv a mesaʒ tu;

Đe oðer bj himself staid oðer wurk tu dü .

--- --- Ael ðat plësing iz tu living ër, 

 Waz ðër konsorted in ön harmonï.

Burdz, voisez, instrvments, wäters, wjndz, âl agrï.

Đe ʒoius burdz shrouded in chërful shäd [n. p.]

Đeir nöts untu ðe vois attempred swït:

Đ’anʒëlikal soft trembling voisez mäd

Tu ð’instrvments divjn respondens mït:

Đe silver-sounding instrvments did mït

With ðe bäz murmur of ðe wäterz fâl:

Đe wäterz fâl with diferens diskrït

Nou soft, nou loud, untu ðe wjnd did kâl.

Đe ʒentl warbling wjnd löu answered untu âl .

 

Huic quodammodo contraria est congeries, coacervatio, Συναθροισμὸς, Επιτροχασμὸς.

11. Unam congeries in summam sparsa reducit.

Rapsodia poetica in carmine cui titulus Dëdlj swïtnes.

Swït thouħts, ðe füd on which J fïding starv;

 Swït tërz, ðe drink ðat mör augment mj thirst;

 Swït eiz, ðe starz bj which mj kours duth swarv;

 Swït höp, mj dëth which wast mj ljf at first;

 Swït thöuħts, swït tërz, swït höp, swït eiz,

 Hou chânst ðat dëth in swïtnes ljz?

 

Ibidem titutlo: Brëk hëvi hart.

 Mjn eiz, no eiz, but fountainz of mj tërz:

 Mj tërz, no tërz, but fludz tu moist mj hart:

Mj hart, no hart, but harbour of mj fërz:

 Mj fërz, no fërz, but filing of mj smart.

  Mj smart, mj fërz, mj hart, mj tërz, mjn eiz

  Ar bljnd, drj’d, spent, past, wästed with mj krjz.

And yit mjn eiz, ðoħ bljnd, sï kauz of grïf:

 And yit mj tërz, ðoħ drj’d, run doun amäin:

 And yit mj hart, ðoħ spent, atendz relïf:

 And yit mj fërz, ðoħ past, inkrës mj pain:

  And yit J liv, and living fïl mör smart:

 And smarting, krj in vain, Brëk hëvi hart. [n. p.]

Ubi praeter congeriem, habes continuam anaforam, epanorthosin, anadiplosin, asyndeton, zeugma, et secundo loco regressionem, omnes illustres figuras. Sed ne nimio suffitu nasus tuus petulanter lasciviat, alligabo cingulo etiam Αιγὸς πώγωνα, quem Κακοσύνθετον, Κακόζηλον, Κακόφατον, sive Κακέμφατον, appellant, qui tamen quia lingua nostra mascula est, et asperitate non inconcinna (attamen rarenter, ut et aliis figuris modeste) delectatur: hoc maximum vitium habet; quod nimium scriptoris otium, et κακοζηλίαν redarguat. Exemplum habes Ecloga 10.

And when ðe stuborn strök of stronger stound

Hath sumwhat slakt ðe tenor of ðj string.

Illa etiam Tusseri (nisi verum auctoris nomen obliuio abstulerit) in hoc sunt nigro.

Täk thankfulj thingz, thanking tenderlj ðöz,

Đat tëch ðj thriftilj ðj tjm tu transpöz.

Quae ex antiqua scriptionis forma, omnia inceperunt a t, idque elegantius quam, plaudite procelli porcorum pigra propago, aut ullus versus Macaronicus Merlini Coccaii.

 

CAPUT XXIII

Exocha

 

Monitio ad lectorem

Dum conchas margaritiferas expiscor ad orationis ornatum, in murices et aspera loca incidi, unde vix tandem enatavit oratio. Asperitatis causae plures, una in methodo quam scriptores variam sequuntur: altera in nominibus quae pro suo quisque libitu figuris imponit; quorum alicubi tanta multiplicitas, ut rem per se apertam [n. p.] obscuriorem reddiderit: tertia, quod nonnullas figuras scriptores distrahunt, quae sua natura confusae sunt. His accedunt aliae, quod obscuras quasdam et vulgatas syntaxeos formulas in schemata referent: quod figuras ad sermonem tantum exornandum comparatas, ad opes rhetoricas detulerunt. In quibus omnibus sic ego a logonomis aliquoties dissention, ut alios etiam a me dissentire velim, hoc est, ad clariorem rei explicationem. Satis habet excusationis hoc quod dixi, si nonnullas forte videris deesse figuras quas alii adnumerant: apud me enim aut nullae sunt; aut indignae quae in censum irrepserint; aut quae ad has cogi possunt; aut quae in alium gregem compelli debent. In exemplis quae adduxi, brevitatis studium culpam a me, et queremoniam deprecabitur, si dum nuda figurarum exempla propono recisis circumstantiis, orationis flos fere totus evanuit. Neque enim apud nostros poetas admodum rarae sunt figurae, aut solae veniunt; addo etiam plures esse quam quas latini numerant: quas tamen ambitiose non venor, ne sermo hactenus obscurus, et nihili habitus, pro laude invidiam contrahat, si cum famosis illis linguis et in pretio collocatis, de palma eloquentiae decertaret. Sunt tamen nonnullae figurae, quas nec debeo nec possum silentio involvere, quae non unam tantum sententiam exornant, sed in longa orationis serie continuae sunt; in iis, apud latinos, sola est et illustrissima Epimone, cuius exemplum est.

So doun hïl fel, and fürth hiz ljf did brëth, 

Đat vanisht intu smök, and kloudez swift:

So doun hï fel, ðat ð’erth him undernëth

Did grön, az fïbl so grët löd tu lift:

So doun hï fel, az a hvʒ roki klift,

Whüz fâls foundäsion wävz hav washt awai,

And röuling doun grët Neptvn duth dismai:

So doun hï fel, and ljk a hëped mountain lai .

 

Unthankful wrech (said hï) iz ðis ðe mïd 

With which her soverain mersi ðou dust qujt?

Đj ljf shï säved bj her gräsius dïd:

But ðou dust mën with vilenus dispjt

Tu blot her onor, and her hëvnli ljħt.

Dj, raðer dj, ðen so disloialj

Dïm of her hjħ dezert, or sïm so ljħt, [Q]

 Fäir dêth it iz tu shun mör shäm, ðen dj,

Dj, raðer dj, ðen ever luv disloialj.

But if tu luv disloialtj it bi,

Shal J ðen hät her ðat from dëthez dör

 Mï brouħt? ah far bï such repröch from mï.

 What kan J les du ðen her luv ðerför,

 Sith J her dv reward kannot restör?

 Dj, räðer dj, and djing du her serv,

 Djing her serv, and living her adör.

 Đj ljf shï gäv, ðj ljf shï duth dezerv.

 Dj, räðer dj, ðen ever from her servis swerv .

 

Et ne semper Sidneios loquamur et Spenseros, audi epilogum fabulae quam docuit boreali dialecto poeta, titulumque fecit, Reus Machiavellus.

  Mächil iz hanged,

  And brened iz hiz bvks.

  Đoħ Mächil iz hanged,

  Yit hï iz not wranged.

  Đe dïl haz ’im fanged

  In hiz krvked klvks.

  Mächil iz hanged,

  And brened iz hiz bvks.

 

Ea est Epimone, sequuntur aliae, qua ego communi nomine ξοχα appello, si tibi suis quasque nominibus insignire placebit, ego tibi debebo. Una est quum animus auditoris aut lectoris, dubius, et pendens detinetur; cui tandem rei, aut personae, illa quae dicuntur adhaerebunt, ut Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 10.

Đen up aröz a man of machles mjħt,

 And wundrus wit tu manaʒ grët afäirz:

 Whü stird with piti of ðe stresed pljħt

 Of ðis sad rëlm, etc. tandem post versus 24. sequitur. [n. p.]

Donwalo dj’d, vnde demum intelligitur, quis fuerit tantorum facinorum auctor.

 Under ðat pörch a kumli däm did rest, 

 Klad in fäir wïdz. post versus 17 sequitur

 Whërat Ekses eksïdinglj waz wröth .

 

Haec figura sive synchesin, sive hyperbaton; illustris sane est: sed quia ad effectum auditoris magis valet, quam ad sermonis ornatum; ad aliud forum reiicietur. Quae sequuntur omnes in orationis ornatu totae sunt. Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 6.

 No trï, whüz branchez did not brävli spring;

 No branch, wheron a fjn burd did not sit;

 No burd, but did hir shril nöt swïtlj sing;

 No song, but did kontain a luvlj dit,

Trïz, branchez, burdz, and songz, wër främed fit

For tu alvr frail mjndz tu kärles ëz:

Kärles ðe man sün wox, and hiz wëk wit

 Waz overkum of thing ðat did him plëz.

 So plëzed, did hiz wrathful küraʒ fair apëz.

 

Quantus hic artifex? quae periodus? quot figurae? Anafora, traductio, et quam alii habent Ισόκωλον, σχέσις, anadiplosis, asyndeton, congeries, gradatio, ut minutas dissimulem. Annon universam ferme Talei rhetoricam una σκιαγραφίᾳ complexus est? audi tamen illustriorem.

--- --- st wreched man 

Đat tu affeksionz duz ðe brjdl lend:

In ðeir beginning ðei ar wëk, and wan,

 But sün throuħ sufferans, gröu tu fërful end;

 Whjlz ðei ar wëk, bitjmz with ðem kontend;

 For when ðei öns tu perfekt strength du gröu,

 Strong warz ðei mäk, and krvel batri bend [Q 2]

 Gainst fort of Rëzn it tu overthröu.

Wrath, ʒelosi, grïf, luv, ðis squjr hav laid ðus löu.

Wrath, ʒelosi, luv, du ðus expel.

Wrath iz a fjr, and ʒelosi a wïd;

 Grïf iz a flud, and luv a monster fel:

 Đe fjr of sparks, ðe wïd of litl sïd;

 Đe flud of drops, ðe monster filth did brïd:

 But sparks, sïd, drops, and filth, du ðus delai:

 Đe sparks sün quench, ðe springing sïd outwïd,

 Đe drops drj up, and fi lth wjp klën awai,

So shal wrath, ʒelosi, grïf, luv, dj and dekai .

Aliam habes huic dissimilem, nel minus elegantem.

 Among ðëz knjħts ðër wër thrï breðern böuld,

 Thrï böulder breðern never wer iborn;

 Born of ön muðer in ön hapi möuld,

 Born at ön burðen in ön hapi morn,

Thrjz hapi muðer, and thrjs hapi morn,

 Đat bör thrï such! thrï such not tu bï fond.

 Her näm waz Agape, whüz children wërn

 AEl thrï az ön; ðe first hjħt Prjamond,

Đe sekond Djamond, ðe yungest Trjamond.

Stout Prjamond, but not so strong tu strjk;

 Strong Djamond, but not so stout a knjħt;

 But Trjamond, waz stout and strong aljk.

 On hors-bak vzed Trjamond tu fjħt,

 And Prjamond on füt had mör deljt;

 But hors, and füt knv Djamond tu wïld.

With kurtax vzed Djamond tu smjt;

 And Trjamond tu handl spër and shïld;

But spër and kurtax both, vz’d Prjamond in fïld .

 

 Iam fateris ad sermonis ornatum nihil a nostris praetermissum. Neque enim solus est in hoc genere Homerus noster; exiguum dixi, Spenserus [n. p.] noster: nam et sermonis cultu accuratior est; et sententiis ut crebrior, ita gravior; et inventionis varietate locupletior: et materiae cognitione multo utilior; utpote qui morales virtutes, secundum omnes suas circumstantias, aptissime et copiosissime, iucundissimis figmentis poeticis descripsit. Quod autem Homerus (ut etiam Aeschylus aliique vetustiores poetae) deos adeo cicures habuerit; quodque tot in suis indecora dormitarit, ut et eius exemplo Virgilius; aut rudi adhuc poesi condonandum est; aut ipsis etiam hominibus imputandum: qui aut omnia sibi licere arbitrabantur, aut lectores non satis attentos et perspicaces sperabant, aut ipsi saltem, decori non satis idonei iudices et praeceptores fuerunt. Sed non est (inquam) solus in hoc studii genere Spencerus, invenies enim et apud alios permulta huiusmodi; sed ego honoris causa unum tantum Sidneium cito.

Đe fjr tu sï mï wrong’d for anger burneth 

 Đe äier in tërz for mjn affliksion wïpeth,

Đe së for grïf tu eb hiz flöuing turneth,

Đe ërth with piti dul her senter kïpeth,

 Fäm iz with wunder bläzed,

 Tjm flïz awai for soröu,

  Pläs standeth stil amäzed,

Tu sï mj njħt of ïvlz which hath no moröu.

  Alas âl onlj shï no piti täketh

 Tu knöu mj mizerjz, but chäst and krvel

  Mj fâl hir glöri mäketh:

 Yit stil hir eiz giv tu mj flämz ðeir fvel.

Fjr, burn mï qujt til sens of burning lëv mï:

Aier, let mï drâ ðis breth no mör in anguish:

Së, droun’d in ðï of vital breth birëv mï:

erth, täk ðis ërth whërin mj spirits languish:

 Fäm, sai J waz not born:

Tjm, hast mj djing ouer:

Pläs, sï mj gräv up-torn:

Fjr, äier, së, ërth, fäm, tjm, pläs, sheu yür pour.

  Alas from âl ðeir helps am J exjled,

 For herz am J, and dëth fërz hir displëzvr; [Q 3]

  Fj dëth, ðou art bigjled,

Đoħ J bï herz, shï sets bj mï no trëzvr .

 

CAPUT XXIIII

De syntaxi poetica

 

Ad varios usus ex omni materia fiunt vasa: at gemma quaeque non nisi in auro elaboratissimo ostenditur. Sic ad omnia animi sensa depromenda accommodatus est sermo: at in carmine, ubi nihil audiendum est, nisi quod rarum, tersum, politum, delicatum, novum, et a vugli captu et opinione remotum, laudandus sermo non est, nisi purus, vivus, et concinnus. Duo igitur sunt quae praeter materiam, syntaxin poeticam a soluta disterminant: onatus, et numerus. Ornatus ille est quem dixi schematisticus, in soluta oratione rarior, omnino nullus in illis quae dixi ξοχα: in poetica frequentior, sed tum denique gratus, quum ita necessarius, ut res videatur aliter exprimi nec posse, nec debere. Hic autem a scripturientibus aliquibus plurimum peccatur, qui in orationis cultu ita lasciuiunt, ac si in theatrum scortum aliquod sumptuosum darent, non virginem pudicam in nuptias. De numero poetico itum est diversa; sive ille rythmicus esse debet, sive temporarius: litem posthac ut potero dirimam. Numerus autem quicunque sit, ille mollissime labi videtur, qui in pura oratione a vulgata syntaxi quam minimum distat.

 

Exemplum

It iz ðe mjnd ðat mäketh gud, or il;

Đat mäketh wrech, or hapi, rich or pör. [n. p.]

 For ön ðat hath abundans at hiz wil,

 Hath not inuħ; but wants in grëtest stör:

 Anoðer ðat hath litl, sïks no mör,

 But in ðat litl iz both rich and wjz:

For wizdum iz möst richez. --- ---, etc.

Sed quia numerus poeticus, et ordo syntaxeos non semper conveniunt; et poetae necessario observandus est uterque numerus; et rythmi causa frequentior est in tropis, et temporis in hyperbato; aliquando etiam ad synchesin cogitur.

--- --- Shï fäirlj him bisöuħt-

 Himself tu chërish, and konsvming thöuħt

 Tu put awai out of hiz kärful brest.

In omni carminis genere rythmico necesse est ut ultima versus syllaba natura sua acuti toni capax sit, si rythmus sit masculus; id est, si versus sit acatalecticus: si hypercatelecticus, in penultima, nam syllaba ultima hic est hypermetra. In hoc autem carmine trimetro cataletico, sunt enim omnes versus ultimo cuiusque stanzae excepto decasyllabi, necesse est ut in ultima primi metri, aut initio sequentis, hoc est in quarta, aut sexta syllaba gradus sit; qui quidem sisti nequit, nisi in syllaba quae accentum acutum recipiat: hoc autem in vulgata syntaxi non fit, quae sic est.

--- --- Shï fäir bisöuht him

 Tu cherish himself, and tu put awai

 Konsvming thöuħt out of hiz kärful brest.

Atque ideo vocum metathesi sive hyperbato opus fuit ad legitimum tempus, et rythmi gratia, metonymia continentis brest, pro contento hart. Est autem vocum quaedam transpositio, quam ita facile feret lingua anglica, ut nihil a communi syntaxi differre iudicetur. Sin autem gradus [n. p.] hic ut dixi non observetur; si saepius fiat, poetae vitium est: si rarius, ut reliqua concinniora videantur, ita locum habet ut cacemfaton. Exemplum est ibidem.

 In ashez and sakklόth hï did aräi

 Hiz dainti körs -- --- etc. pro sákkloth.

Atque haec est syntaxis quam dixi poeticam.

 

Prosodia

Est quarta logonomiae pars, de accentu, et metro. Prosodiam literarum in grammatica docuimus: sequitur porro ille accentus qui est vocum singularum, et orationis, ad quam accommodantur interpuntiones.

 

CAPUT XXV

De accentu

 

Vocum prosodia usu potius quam regulis percepitur: ea tota in accentu est. Accentus est duplex, grammaticus, et rhetoricus. Grammaticus est qua vocalis una, aut diphthongus, in omni dictione affecta est. Rhetoricus, qui ad sensum animo altius infigendum, emfasin in una voce habet potius quam alia. Monosyllaba omnia per se accepta accentum acutum habere intelliguntur: at composita, nunc in priori tonum habent, ut hrsman, shíphük, nunc in posteriori, ut withstánd, withdráu, himsélf. Quaedam ita facilia sunt, ut accentum utrobiuis recipiant, ut church-yard, outrun, outräʒ.

Dissylaba qua oxytona sunt, bilív, asúr, aswáʒ, [n. p.] enfόrs, konstráin: qua paroxytona, ut píti, kúler, fόlöu.

Trissylaba quaedam paroxytona sunt, ut regráter, bilúved, akquáinted; quaedam proparoxytona, ut mízeri, désteni; quaedam indifferentia, ut förgoing, förstâler.

 Animadvertendum autem nos tanto impetu in nonnullis vocibus accentum retrahere, ut nulla syllabarum longitudo, natura aut positione facta contraveniat: idque non in nostris tantum fόrester, kárpenter: sed etiam in illis quae doctuli a latinis asciverunt, ut aúditor, kompétitor, kόnstansi, réʒister, témperans, instrvment, múltitvd. Hic autem duplici cautela opus: prima, ut illa excipias quae ad nos integra transierunt; quibus ea humanitate utimur qua peregrinis, qui suo iure et more vivunt, ut Amintas, Erinnis, Baricado. Secundo excipias illa a latinis in io, quae quanquam in notrum ius concesserunt, proprium tamen accentum retinent in antepenultima, ut opínion, satisfáksion, et alia sic exeuntia mínion, fránion, etc.

Plurisyllaba etiam (quod in aliis quas scio linguis non fit) accentum saepius in quarta recipiunt, ut ôkvpjer, víʒilansi, líteratvr: et omnia fere illa quae in munger exeunt aut abl, ut kόsterdmunger, íernmunger, márchantabl, máriʒabl, mízerabl, όnorabl. Mirum dixeris si tonum in quinta repereris, tamen sic lege múltipliabl, vítrifiabl, Kόnstantinopl, et alia fortasse plura.

Duo sunt quae tonum variant: differentia, et numerus poeticus. 1. Differentia est, qua vox voci quodammodo opponitur; haec accentum transfert in syllabam vulgariter accentuatae praecedentem, ut du yü täk mï rjħt, or místäk mï? Sic wíthhöld, únthankful, díshonestlj, dísonorabl, dísonorablj, etiam, et únmëzvrablj; huc refer dezért, [R] meritum, et dézert, desertum aut solitudo, etc. Numerus poeticus proparoxytonis in i saepe ultimam productam acuit, ut mizerj, konstansj, destinj: unde etiam in prosa fere obtinuit, ut ultima vel longa vel brevi aequaliter scribantur, et pronuncientur, non acuantur tamen.

De Rhetorico accentu difficilius est iudicium; quia suum cuique est, et varium. Exemplo res melius intelligetur.

Mj song, if ani ask whüz grïvus plaint iz such

Dj, ër ðou let hiz nám bï knöun: hiz fόli shöuz tü much

But best wër ðï tu híd, et nèver kum tu ljħt:

For ön ðe érth kan nön but ’J, ðjn aksents sound arjħt.

 

Diximus monosyllabla omnia acui, hoc est accentu grammatico: aut in orationis contextu illis tantum vocibus est accentus oratorius, sive quaedam toni νέργεια, quibus sensus vis et νάργεια, inest: reliquae omnes prae his quodammodo barytonae habeantur. Ego igitur sic ista lego, ut versus primus uno tenore, et aequalis fluat. In secundo tribus voculis accinitur dj, nám, fόli: quia, ex sensu apparenti moriendum potius est carmini, quam nomen auctoris indicandum; cui tanta stultitia malum est omen. At ex implicita antanaclasi, sine diastola Τῶν dj et er, let ðou hiz näm bï knöun, djer; etiam cum priori tepidius erit, et sine accentu oratorio efferendum. Duos sequentes versus licet ego sic legam, ut hjd et néver in priori accentuem; érth, J, et djn, in posteriori: alius tamen fortasse aliter; idque cum bona utrinque ratione. Atque haec de accentu acuto grammatico, et oratorio, praecepta sunt. Gravis ubique intelligitur, ubi alius non est accentus. Circumflexus [^] in aliis dialectis frequentius auditur quam in communi; ubi tamen ea est aliquando vocis alicuius prosodia, ut sensum mutet. Exemplo: J [n. p.] am afráid of him, i.e. metuo ab illo; J am afrâid of him, i.e. quid de illo futurum sit timeo.

Accentui inserviunt interpunctiones: quia illae ut sensum aperiunt, ita quantum possunt accentui viam sternunt. Eaedem sunt nobis quae latinis, et usus idem: sunt autem Κόμμα sive incisum [,], Ὑποδιαστολὴ aut subdistinctio [;] Κῶλον sive membrum [:] Περίοδος sive sententiae et sensus integra complexio [.] His adiunge interrogationis notam [?] et exclamationis [!] Παρενθέσει (scientibus loquor) nihil includi debet quod cum ulla voce in reliqua orationis ferie syntaxin habet: at Ὑποπαρενθέσει [()] illud quod abesse quidem potest, sed cum alia aliqua sententiae voce construitur.

 

Exemplum

Đe (best said hï) ðat J kan yü advjz,

Iz tu avoid ð'okäzion of ðe il.

Đe kauz remüved whens ð’ïvl duth arjz

(Az sün it mai) ð’efekt sursëseth stil.

Huc accedit Απόστροφος in ð’efekt, et in vocibus compositis Υφὴ sive maccaf [-], ut hart-ëting, grïf. Et ultimo (si tu concedas lector) in Διαιρέσει, Διαστολὴ […] in συναιρέσει, Ἁρπη [ʊ], ut in okäzion trissyllaba, sed his et Ὑποπαρενθέσει in usu frequenti, locus raro conceditur.

 

CAPUT XVI

De metro

 

Metrum apud nos large acceptum, aliquando significat ipsa in carmine omoioteleuta: nonnumquam ponitur pro omni oratione adstrictâ numeris; sic enim [R 2] metrum, et prosam opponimus. Sed hic pro omni mensura syllabae, pedis, metri proprie dicti, et carminis usurpo.

 

De syllaba

 

Syllabarum quantitas septem modis agnoscitur: 1. vocali, 2. diphthongo, 3. accentu, 4. positione, 5. derivatione, 6. praepositione, 7. metaplasmo.

 

1. Vocalis et 2. diphthongus

Satis apparuit in grammatica, quae syllaba longa aut brevis censeri debet, ex vocalibus, quas longas aut breves esse diximus. 1. Poetae tamen illa in j desinentia licenter corripiunt; quia in fluxu orationis accentus in propinqua syllaba eius longitudinem absorbet. At si syllaba accentu ullo grammatico, vel rhetorico afficiatur, non corripitur, ut mj moni◡ ◡.

2. V in fine anceps est, ut nv, trv; at consona in eadem voce monosyllaba sequente, longa est, ut svr, pvr. Sic in dissylabis, si accentum habeat, ut manúr, refúz verbum; at accentus in priori, ultimam ancipitem relinquit, ut in réfvz subst. 3. Vocalis, aut diphthongus, ante vocalem non corripitur necessario ut apud latinos. Sed contra, vocalis longa, aut diphthongus, ante vocalem semper producitur, si in se accentum habeat, ut deníing, displáied. 4. Vocalis, aut diphthongus per synalaepham licentia poetica nonnunquam intercipitur: sed frequentissime intercidit u, in tu dativi et infinitivi signo; et e, in articulo ðe, tamen non semper. In ðou ante art diphthongus saepe deficit.

 

3. Accentus

Omnis syllaba, accentum acutum habens aut circumflexum, longa est: idque maxime si syllaba dictionis prima [n. p.] non sit. Nam prima natura sua brevis, accentum saepe admittit, ut góing, dúing, áni, spírit, bódi, quae etiam si ex vocali breves esse intelligantur, accentu tamen subinde communes fiunt, ut in illo choriambo Lädi ladï.

2. In trissylabis etiam, acutus in brevi ante liquidam, syllabam aliquando ancipitem facit, ut in máladj, símoni, ʒéneral, bénefit.

3. Vocalis brevis in ultima, ante duplicem, aut etiam ante solam liquidam, accentu anceps fit. Ut begín, distíl, defér, prolóng. Idipsum etiam in monosyllabis accentu acutisssimis fiet, ut áx, ʒúʒ, fél, sín, sóng, wár, ʒár. Quam formam quaedam etiam ante mutam sequuntur, ut búd, gemma; bút, meta.

4. Omnis syllaba ante accentuatam brevis est, ut dezjr, abröad, abándon, devíded, divínlj, bilíving, prevénted: nisi obstet natura, ut in förgóing, förspéking; aut positio, ut forgótn, forgíving. Sed hic tantum valet accentus, ut in mutis duplicatis alteram elidat, ut aténd, apíring, opözed, adrésed, pro atténd, appïring, oppózed, addrésed. Sed ut consonam elidat vel non, poetae in medio relinquitur.

 5. Syllabae quae solis constant consonantibus, quia accentum nunquam recipiunt, breves iudicantor, ut sadl, trubl, moistn.

 6. Accentus rhetoricus longas praecedentes saepenumero corripit, ut If yi bi âl thïvz, what höp hav J? Ubi vocales natura longae in , , häv, ratione accentuum in âl et J correptae sunt.

 

4. Positio

 In diversis dictionibus positio saepe valet ut apud latinos; at in eadem dictione, accentus positioni praevalet; ita ut [R 3] in trissyllabis, accentus in prima sonora aut positione longa abbreviet utrasque sequentes, ut in Chéstertun, Wímbldun. Nec quisquam, qui anglice novit, negare audebit Ténterden stïpl esse carmen adonicum. Nam hic adeo violentus est accentus, ut etiam in diversis dictionibus positionem auferat. Idipsum affirmabis, si sussexios audias in Wáterdoun fórrest. Adeo clarus est accentus in primo trissyllabo, licet positione non elevetur. Hic tamen cautela opus, nam si ad positionem 1. n vel ng concurrat, media syllaba producitur, ut Sémpringam, Trúmpingtun, A'bington, Wímundam, Wílfulnes, etc. Quod dixi apparebit exemplo.

What if a dai, or a munth, or a yër: hemistichium est, duobus constans dactylis, et choriambo, nemo dubitat. Sö it befel on a Péntekost dai: nec quisquam hic magnopere haeret, nisi quod particula it tardius sequi videtur ob positionem; at metaplasmo occidentali ivél pro bifél nihil currit rotundius; nam positio illa in kost, nullo modo tempus retardet propter accentum in pen. Positio alias valet ad longitudinem, ut Gilzland, London, harvest.

 

5. Derivatio

Derivativa eandem cum primitivis quantitatem plerumque sortiuntur, ut dj, djing; dezjr, dezjred; profän, profänlj. Excipiuntur illa quae a longis enata, vocalem natura longam corripiunt, ut a mjzer, mizerabl, mizeri. Et anomala coniugationis primae, quae figurativam commutant, ut a rëd, red; a swët, swet; a wrjt, writ; strjk, strik, etc. His adde unum tertiae , did. Secundo excipiuntur illa a peregrinis deducta, quibus syllabarum quantitas natura, positione, aut accentu mutatur, ut a noto, as, tu nöt; a magnifico, tu magnifj; a potens, pötent, etc. [n. p.] At impotent, omnipotent, suam naturam sequuntur: quod etiam in aliis forte pluribus observabis.

 

6. Praepositio

Praepositiones inseparabiles a, bi, re, etiam un, dif, mis si positio sinat, corripiuntur. Reliquarum omnium quantitas, ex suis vocalibus satis intelligitur.

 

7. Metaplasmus

 Est, quum necessitatis, aut iucunditatis gratia, syllaba, aut dictio a forma propria in aliam mutatur. Huc refer omnes antedictas dialectos praeter communem. Et licet omnis metaplasmus ad syllabarum quantitatem agnoscendam non sit utilis: tamen quia plurimae eius species hic multum possunt, eas omnes simul explicabimus.

 

aProthesis apponit caput id quod baphaeresis aufert :    

ut aarjħt, emmüv pro rjħt, v: et eleganti imitatione latinae compositionis, efraid pro fraid; bvenʒer pro avenʒër.

 

aSyncope de medio tollit, quod bepenthesis infert.   

ut, ahumbles, whüever pro humblnes, et whüsoever; berrand pro ërand .

 

Aufert aapocope finem, quem dat bparagoge .    

ut What J ðe abet for ðj, Spenser, pro beter, btelen, et displëzen, Chaucer, pro tel, displëz.

 

Consonam ut aecthlipsis, vocalem aufert bsynaloepha.

 

Exempla

aFäm with abundans mäketh a man thrjs blessed an happi pro and happi. [n. p.] bFirst, let Simmerian darknes bi mi önl’ habitäsion, pro önlj.

 

aSystola longa rapit, breviata bdiastola longat.

ut Sidneius, untu Cvpid ðat buoi shal a pedante bi found, ubi prima in pedante, a παιδὸς, corripitur.

bDiastola Τασις, Εκτασις, sive extensio dicitur. Exemplum reperies apud eundum Sideneium.

Đat bj a bodi it göz, sins bj a bodi it iz,

ubi ex bodi, perichio, trochaeum facit contra quam eius natura pati potest. Rectius ille in speculo tuscanismi.

Ael gallant virtvz, âl quallitiz of bodi and söul.

Plus satis huiusmodi exemplorum invenies apud Stanihurstum, et alios.

Sins mj nöz outpëking (gud Sir) yür lip-labor hindredth.

Neque enim verum est quod scribit quidam, syllabarum regnum illis consessum, qui prim suo exemplo illarum quantitatem definirent. Syllabae enim natura sua, id est, cuiuscunque linguae idiomate, aut longae sunt, aut breves, aut indifferentes, utcunque mali poetae illarum quantitate abutuntur.

 

Syllaba de binis confecta, synaeresis extat .  

Vsitatissimus est hic mataplasmus in verbalibus passiuis in ed, ut luv’d pro luved, et ubique alias, ut ev’rj pro everj; whatsoever, okäzion, trissylabis. Neque in una tantum dictione synaeresis est, sed etiam in diversis, ut is't not inuħ? pro iz it not, et in communi loquendi formula, much gud du’t yü, pro du it. Sic was’t, for’t, whüz dër pro waz it, for it, whü iz dër, etc. [n. p.]

 

Διαίρεσις, sive Διάλυσις

Dicitur in binas separare diaeresis unam. 

Ut Spencerus, wündes, kloudes, handes; pro wündz, kloudz, handz. Huic cognata est .

 

Τμῆσις, Διακοπὴ, sive intercisio

Dat tmesin partes in binas dictio secta, ut 

Tu us ward, pro toward us .

 

Μετάθεσις

Fit meta rite thesis, si transponas elementa,

 Ut vouched säf, pro vouchsäfed. Spenserus, löm whjl, pro whjlöm .

 

Αντίθεσις, melius Αντίστοιχον

Est antistoechon tibi litera si varietur.

Spenserus, fön, ein, hond, lond pro föz, eiz, hand, land. Hunc referre potes illa tertiae personae indicativi praesentis in s, z, ez, pro eth, ut hï spëks, luvz, tëchez, pro spëketh, luveth, tëcheth. In quibius non tantum est antistaechon sed et synaeresis.

 

Ista metaplasmum communi nomine dicas.

 Quae dixi de quantitate syllabarum, ita abhorrere videbuntur ab auribus illorum qui ad latinam prosodiam assueverunt, ut mihi nunquam satis cavisse, illos satis admovisse possim. Sed si syllaba brevis unius temporis concedatur, longa duorum; ego veritatem appello iudicem, auresque musicorum testes: his causam omnem permitto. Ipsos autem, qui me iudicio postulaverint, adhortor, ut meminerint quam multa latini a graecis discesserunt atque, ut mittam significationem, genus, syntaxin alicubi in prosodia toto caelo aberrarunt; ωmega vix productam in ambo; et ego, et noster Apollo veta. Sed quia de his paulo fusius dicendum est postea, in praesens missa facio.

 

Pedes, quibus anglica poesis utitur, sunt dissylabi tres: spondeus ‒ ‒, trochaeus ‒ , iambus ‒. Trissylabi quinque: tribrachus ◡ ◡ ◡, molossus ‒ ‒ ‒, dactylus ‒ , anapaestus ‒, amphimacrus ‒ ‒. Tetrasyllabos [S] tantum duos animadverti, quorum unus est paeon quartus ‒, alter choriambus ‒ ‒.

 

CAPUT XXVII

Carmen rythmicum

 

In carminum generibus, nihil nostris intentatum relinquitur: res tamen melius successit illis qui rythmo poesin scripserunt, quam qui numeris latinorum. Et quamvis eo acriter docti contenderint, ut graecorum et latinorum numeros assequerentur; eventus tamen optatis non respondit. Et quia, dum portum capesso huic scopulo quasi fato quodam oratio nostra illisa est, remis arbitror et velis certandum, ne afflicta penitus et fracta sit. Sed ne saxo detrusa fluctuet, anchoram inprimis hanc sacram demitto. Omni sermoni suum esse ἰδίωμα quo non inflexione, aut ratione sola syntaxeos ab alio differt, sed sono etiam, accentu, et tota prosodia. Hoc ex superiori capite in nostro satis apparuit. Secundo, uniuscuisque sermonis regulas, ex suo idiomate natas, nec debere, nec posse alterius idiomata coercere. Sic enim non essent amplius ἰδιώματα, sed communes utriusque affectiones. Et ipsius logonomiae ratio universa hoc postulat, ut de singulis linguis regulae propriae de inflexione, de syntaxi, de universa prosodia assignentur. Et ne longius abeam; lingua graeca, et latina (licet inde magna ex parte deducta) non easdem habent de prosodia regulas. Exempla: vocales α, ε, ι, ο, et diphthongi αι, οι, pro carminis ratione, ante vocalem, aut diphthongum eliduntur, aut non. Vocalis brevis ante solam liquidam non raro producitur, ut ρες, Ἄρες βροτόλοιγε. Vocalis dictionis sequentis alquando [n. p.] eliditur ab altera praecedenti. Vocales longae aut diphthongi indifferentes sunt aliis sequentibus. Quarum quidem regularum nulla est, quae in latina prosodia vim suam obtinet, ut nihil de immensa illa graecorum licentia dicam, qua pro carmini necessitate vocales longas corripiunt, aut breves producunt. Atque ut latinam prolem, hoc est linguam hispanicam, italicam, gallicam, perlustres animo; quid tandem causae erit cur latini carminis prosodiam non sequuntur? ἰδίωμα. Fieri potest, ut quemadmodum nos, sic et illi latinos numeros tentarunt; sed re infecta solummodo tentarunt: neque enim apud illos illustre aliquod poema est, latinae poeseos numeros sequunt. Quae res obstitit? ἰδίωμα. Quin etiam si graecum elegium cum latino conferas, invenies illa Theognidis, Solonis, Tyrtaei, aliorum; cum Catulli, Tibulli, et maxime Ovidii numeris, Ennium cum Virgilio. Quae dixi huc omnia redeunt. Non esse adstringendam prosodiam nostram, graecorum aut latinorum regulis, sed nostra tantum virgula, nostram prosodiam metiendam. Nec tamen barbarismi notam propterea linguae anglicae inustam putes, quod numeros latinos non sectemur. Cedo enim, quot linguae sic versus componunt? anne omnes barbarae? anne omnes sordent prae una graeca aut latina? Certes si hebraica lingua sit omnium prima, erit etiam longe optima; utpote quae Adamo indulta caelitus: veterum tamen profetarum poetica, latinorum versuum regulis alligata non est: sic enim penitus ignota non esset. Recentiores magistri barbariei invidiam nil timentes, triplici rythmorum genere contenti sunt. Et quoniam experientia optima est cuiusque rei magistra, exemplis agemus .

 

Iz it onorabl for a man, a nesessiti försing,

Fâlslj tu forsäk öld frindz and stik tu a nv kum? [S 2]

 

Quid quaeso hic ornati est? Ubi numerus, quo versus a vulgata syntaxi differt? Certe licet ea quantitatis ratio observetur in voce onorabl, quam latina prosodia requirit: tamen hoc foedissimum est in ea vitium, quod (contra quem accentus nostri ratio postulat) prima syllaba corripitur: reliquae omnes apud nos breves, producuntur. Alter versus hoc habet incongrui (quod in carmine latino ferendum non est) in verba integra, integros exire pedes, ut Tityrus egit capras laeto gramine pastas. Hoc autem apud nos ideo fieri necesse est propter frequentes voces monosyllabas.

Nihil ergo est quod affert eruditus Campianus ubi hanc litem movet, ideo miserabiliter successisse nostris heroicis ob defectum dactyli; nam et polysyllaba (inquit) gravia sunt, et monosyllaba ad labendum inepta; hoc est, etiam gravia. Sed impediunt illa duo maxime quae dixi; accentus latinis regulis de quantitate plerumque contrarius, et pes in singula verba exiens. Quod si in gravissimum carminis genus heroicum, numerus noster non venit propter gravitatem: multo minus lyricis conveniet; in quibus trochaeus, et iambus, et pedes citissimi dominantur. Sed non adhaeret sermoni nostro calumnia tarditatis; cui affatim omne numeri genus inest; quem omnis lepos, omnes facundiae Veneres, certatim adornant. Sic igitur censeo. Iniquissime agi cum nostris vocibus, si ad latini sermonis trutinam expendantur, proinde latinorum carminum genera ad nostram poesin esse ineptissima; sed retinendum potius esse carmen quod huc usque rythmicum appellatur: in quo omnis numeri decor est, etiam et ipsissimi latini pedes; non tamen ex iisdem regulis, sed nostro canone, qui solus ad nostrum usum accommodatus est, hoc est ex accentu aestimati. Et ne procul discedam, afferam ipsius Campiani carmina observationum, caput 4, quae si fiant [n. p.] homoioteleuta, nihil a vulgatissimis cuiusuis poetae differre videbuntur.

 

          

   Tel    ðem, ðat piti or perversli skorn

         

   Pür    Inglish poesi, az ðe släv tu rjm;

         

   Yü    ar ðöz lofti numberz

     

   ðat    revjv 

     

   
   

         

   which    adorn 

     

   
   

    

 

          

   Trjumfs    of prinsez, and

     

   stern    traʒedjz ;

     

   
   

         

   ðeir    happi tjm ;

     

   
   

    

 

 

          

   And    lërn hensfürth t’attend ðöz happi sprjts

         

   Wüz    bounding fvuri, heiħt, et waiħt

     

   afekts .

     

   
   

         

   deljts .

     

   
   

         

   Asist    ðei läborz, and sit klös tu ðem,

     

   
   

     

   
   

         

   Never    tu part awai til for dezart,

     

   
   

     

   
   

    

 

          

   Đeir    brouz with grët Apolöz baiz    

     

   ar    hid 

     

   
   

         

   yi    hem 

     

   
   

         

   Whü    first tauħt numerus aksents praiz’d bj art:

         

   Hï’l    turn hiz glörj from ðe funni kljmz.

    

 

            

   Đe

     

   north-bred    wits alön tu

     

   patronjz .

     

   
   

         

   Tu

     

   sing    in rjmz .

     

   
   

    

 

Numeros eosdem vides, eosdem pedes. At odiosa sunt (inquis) perpetua homoioteleuta: minuunt enim sermonis maiestatem; et in scena maxime, ubi severa tragaedia intumescit. Huic autem malo satis consultum est a nostris poetis, ubi manente numero neglectus est rythmus; nisi quod ad stilum tragicum molliendum, in fine longioris sermonis sonus similis reperitur. Fateor, licenter nimium fabularum scriptores abusos esse numeris, in comoedia saepius neglexisse: quod quidem poetae magis existimo indecorum, quam si actores in scenam sine toga, sine pallio produceret. Et quia hic honos ubique est habitus poesi nostraae ut in similes sonos exeat: licebit poetae eos non negligere quidem; sed ita temperare, ut scriptoris industria laudem, [S 3] et carminis iucunditas gratiam inveniat. Exemplo potest esse illud Spenceri Ecloga 8.

 

Yï wästful wudz bër witnes of mj wö,

Wherin mj plaints did oftntjmz resound:

Yï kärles burdz ar privi tu mj krjz,

Which in yür songz wër wunt tu mäk a part:

 Đou plëzant spring hast luld mï oft a slïp,

Whüz strëmz mj trikling tërz did oft augment.

 Rezort of pïpl duth mj grïfs augment:

 Đe wâled tounz du wurk mj grëter wo:

 Đe forest wjd iz fiter tu resound

Đe holöu eko of mj kärful krjz, etc.

 

Multa alia possunt esse temperamenta rythmi, ne stomachum moueat, aut fatiget aures: quae fabularum scriptor pro sua industria aut inveniat, aut inventa imitetur. Sed utcunque se eventus dabit, utraque poesis mihi plurimum debebit, qui in vocum orthografia tam facilem stravi viam ad species metaplasmi, in omni carminis genere tam necessarii.

Venio igitur ad carminum genera, rythmica primum, deinde illa quae latinam industriam imitantur. Dixi pedem cuiusque carminis mensuram, et hinc nostris metrum dici. Carminum autem genera logonomi praecipue tria numerarunt. Scenicum, epicum, melicum; quibus promiscuum adiicio; quod epigrammata habet, dialogos, elegia, epitafia, epistolas, etc. Quae tamen omnia ad prima eatenus reducuntur, quatenus aut uno carminis genere constant, aut misto. Scenicum, et epicum, uno fere carminis genere contenta sunt: illud est ut plurimum pentametrum. Spenceri tamen epicum, sive heroicum, nonum quemque versum habet hexametrum; ad gravitatem, et quandam stationis firmitudinem. In scenico, poetae male [n. p.] negligunt ὁμοιοτέλεθτα, quae in epico continua sunt. Sic tamen ut aliquando duos quosque versus ligent; aliquando quaternos: tum primus tertio, secundus quarto saepius respondet. Si sex sint carmina in uno systemate, hoc itali, et inde nos stanzam appellamus: sic respondent quatuor primi, ut ante dictum est, duo ultimi gemelli sunt. Nonnullis septem unum efficiunt systema, sic ut primus versus tertio, secundus quarto, et quinto adsonet; duobus ultimis conspirantibus. Sed quia in pentametris haec frequens sonorum collisio, mollior est quam quo res graves enarrentur: systemata, octo versibus sic componunt, ut primus cum tertio, secundus cum quinto, quartus cum sexto cohaereat, duobus ultimis in fine concurrentibus. Spenseri modos, a figurarum exemplis quas Εξοχα appello, facillime addisces. Melicum carmen mistum est ex duobus, et ultra pluribus fortasse ad sex usque carminum genera; quorum mensura est a monometris usque ad octonarios, nunquam ulterius. Haec etiam carmina, aut catalectica esse possunt, aut acatalectica. Exemplum esto Ben. Iohnsoni ode 14. 

 

ξάκωλοσ, δεκάστροφος

Nou ðat ðe herth iz kround with smjling fjer,

And sum du drink, and sum du dâns,

Sum ring,

Sum sing,

And âl du strjv t’advâns

ðe mvzik hjer:

Whërför shüld J

Stand silent bj?

Whü not ðe lëst

Both luv ðe kauz, and autorz of ðe fëst.

 

Hic vides, ultra pentametrum, nullum versum produci: [n. p.] etiam et illud observare poteris, nullum fere pedem, in illis omnibus quae huc usque commemoravimus reperiri, praeter dissylabum. Reperiuntur tamen alicubi et alii pedes, et versus etiam octonarii, ut in illo perbello cantico Thomasi Campiani τετρακώλῳ δεκαστρόφῳ: cuius mensuram ut rectius agnoscas, exhibeo cum notis.

 

IMAGE

 

What if a dai, or a munth, or a yër, kroun ðj

 Kan not a chauns of a njħt, or an ouer, kros ðj

 

IMAGE

 

dezjrz with a thouzand wisht kontentingz?

 deljt s with a thouzand sad tormentingz:

 

IMAGE

 

Fortvn, onnor, beuti, yuth, är but blossumz djing:

Wanton plëzvr, döting luv, är but shaddöuz fljing.

 

IMAGE

 

AEl our ʒoiz är but toiz, jdl thouħts dësëving.

Nön hath pouer of an ouer, in ðeir ljvz birëving.

 

Primi duo versus sunt octonarii: quorum tamen longitudo frequentibus dactylis primo, secundo, quarto, quinto; et tertio choriambo compensatur. Sequentes duo senarii sunt quibus tertius pes molossus est, reliqui spondaei. Ultimi, duobus constant dimetris catalecticis, et trimetro acatelectico. Et licet hae melicorum mensurae canticis quidem aptissimae sint; heroica tamen ad latinum exemplar composita, [n. p.] et alia epica, periti musici birdus, aliique plures, melodiis illustrarunt; quemadmodum psalmorum parafrasin Nathan Chytraeus.

Carminum genus quod promiscuum dixi, ad duo priora epicum, et scenicum, proxime accedit: quia ferme unius sunt generis, aliquando etiam duorum: mensura tamen alia est atque alia. Namque nonnulla dimetra sunt, et inde usque ad hexametra. Heptametrum prioris aetatis metafrastis Faiero, Goldingo, aliisque in usu erat: recentioribus raro solum est, sed in materia tristiori cum hexametro nonnunquam miscetur, in elegos.

Exemplum:

 

Hï ðat hiz mirth hath lost; whüz kumfort iz dismaid,

 Whüz höp iz vain, whüz faith iz skorn’d, whüz

  trust iz âl bitraid

 If hï häv held ðem dier, and kanot sës tu mön;

Let him kum täk hiz pläz bj mï, hï shal not rv alön.

 

Aliae sunt carminum elegiacorum mensurae; maxime pentametrum: sed in dicolis aliquibus, carminum inaequalitas elevat materiae gravitatem, ut inter illa Dasisoni, pag. 200.

 

O faithles world! and ðj möst faithles part,

  a wumanz hart!

 

In summa, ita lasciviunt poetae nostri in carminum generbius, in rythmis, et utriusque mixturis, ut nihil fere excogitari possit, cuius exempla apud illos abunde non reperies.

 

CAPUT XXVIII

De carminibus ad numeros latinorum poetarum compositis

 

Expediam igitur illa carminum genera, quae latina exempla sequuta sunt. De ipsis numeris quid censedum [T] supra diximus: itaque satis erit nuda exempla proposuisse. Heroicis, liber 4. Primos libros Aeneidos Virgilii transtulit Stanihurstus, ad sensum quodammodo, et subdolo consilio si aperirem: sed quia privato non est opus. Ita tamen inconcinne concatenatur numeri, ut risum captasse videatur, potius quam poetam vertisse.

J ðat in öld sëzn with rïdz Otn harmoni whistled

Mj rvral sonnet: from forrest flitted, J forsed

Đe sulking swinker ðë soil ðoħ kraggi tu sunder.

 

Nec melioris monetae sunt illa quae postea sequuntur elegiaca, quibus bis et vigesies redit.

Qua ratis egit iter, iuncto bove plaustra trahuntur; postquam tristis hyems frigore vinxit aquas.

Whër ships saild, ðe wagonz är nou draun strongly with oxn:

Bj rezn of ðe river knit with a frosti soder.

 

At divino Sidneii ingenio, et dicendi copiae sic omnia fluunt, ut latinos ingenio superasse dixeris, aequasse facundia. Testis sit Echo, Arcadiae, liber 2, cantus 29.

Fair roks, gudli riverz, swït wuds, when shâl I si pës?

Pës? whu debarz mj tung? whu iz it ðat kumz mi so nj?

 

His paria sunt elegiaca Arcadiae, liber 3, cantus 1.

Untu a kaitjv wrech, whüm long affliksion höldeth,

 And nou fulli bilïvz help tu bi qujt perished,

Graunt yit, graunt yit a lük, tu ðe last monvment of hiz anguish

 O yu (alas so I fjnd) kauz of hiz onli rvjn!

 

Arcadiae, liber 1, cantus 19 spem suam sapphicis alloquitur.

If min eiz kan serv tu du harti ërand,

 Or min eiz languaʒ shi du hap tu ʒuʒ of,

So ðat eiz messäʒ bi of hir resëued ,

  Hop wi du liv yit, etc.

 

Phaleuciorum, quae ἑνδεκασύλλαβα nominant (nam et sapphica sunt undecim syllabarum) exemplum habes [n. p.] inter illa Dauisoni, p. 123.

 Wizdum warnz mi tu shun ðat öns J söuħt for,

 And in tjm tu retjr mi hasti fütsteps, etc.

 

Quin etiam ad exempla latinorum poetarum, omnia fere lyricorum genera reperies in illa psalmorum Dauidicorum metaphrasi, quae a Philippo Sidneio incaepta, ab aliis ad umbilicum perducta est. Etiam praeter haec quae diximus carninum genera, habes et alia octo apud Campianum, libello antèe citato: nos mensuram qua singula descripsit dabimus, et versus quot satis erunt in exempla. Primum autem monendus est lector, versus nostros, quinque tantum pedibus constantes, iisque fere dissylabis, propter sermonis nostri gravitatem, latinorum senarios aequare. Gravitatis autem sive tarditatis nostraae causam ponunt in frequentibus monosyllabis: ego potius in frequenti consonantium concursu. Namque, ut apud latinos syllabae ab una tantum consona cum vocali fiunt, aut duabus, rarius a tribus, ut ultima linea rerum mors; sic in nostro sermone sonoro et masculo, cum una vocali tres, quatuor, quinque, aut etiam sex consonantes reperias, ut mör, stör, strong, thirst, stormez, strength, strengths.

Primum Campianicorrum carminum est ex puris iambis, ut

 Đe mör sekvr, ðe mör ðe strök wi fïl

Of unprevented harmz: So glümi stormz

A pier ðe sterner, if ðe dai bi klier.

 

Imabicus autem mistus recepit pro imabo; in loco primo, secundo, et quarto; tribrachum, spondeum, aut dactylum, raro anapaestum, idque secundo aut quarto loco. Exemplum ante attuli: tel ðem ðat pitti or perversli skorn, etc. Reperitur autem aliquando etiam tertio loco tribrachus, ut

Sum träd in Barbari, sum in Turki träd. Item:

Men ðat du fâl tu mizerj, quikli fâl. [T 2]

 

aliquando in quinto, ut

Renoun’d in ev’ri art ðër livz not ani.

 

Etiam et in primo loco trochaeum admittit, modo in secundo spondaeus, dactylus, aut tribrachus consequatur.

Exemplum: ‒ , cum ‒ ‒

 Az ðe fair sun ðe ljħtsum hëvn adornz.

Exemplum: ‒ , cum ‒ ◡ ◡

 Nöbl, inʒenius, and diskrïtli wjz.

Exemplum: ‒ , cum ◡ ◡ ◡

 Beuti tu ʒelosi bringz ʒoi, sorro, fër.

Hae sunt ergo mensurae versus iambici.

 

              

    ‒ ‒

     

   ‒ ‒

     

   
   

     

   ‒ ‒

     

   
   

         

   ‒ ◡

     

   ◡ ◡ ‒

     

   
   

     

   ◡ ◡ ‒

     

   
   

         

   ‒ ◡ ◡

     

   ‒ ◡ ◡

     

   
   

     

   ‒ ◡ ◡

     

   
   

         

   ◡ ◡ ◡

     

   ◡ ◡ ◡

     

   ◡ ◡ ◡

     

   ◡ ◡ ◡

     

   ◡ ◡ ◡

         

    ◡ ‒

     

   ◡ ‒

     

   ◡ ‒

     

   ◡ ‒

     

   ◡ ‒

    

 

Ubi velim aequus lector animaduertat, quot loci conceduntur tribacho, dactylo, anapaesto, pedibus, sermoni nostro (si qui alii) ineptissimis. Et tamen vel sic (ut antè ostendimus) nihil deest ad vsitatissimum versum praeter homoioteleuta.

Secumdum carminis genus est dimetrum iambicum, duobus constans pedibus: quorum primus spondaeus esse potest, trochaeus etiam, aut iambus; secundus, amphimacrus, aut paeon quartus.

Exempla:

 

        

   Räving    war bigot

   

In    ðe thirsti    sandz

   

Of    ðe Libian jlz,

   

etc.

     

   Nëver    of ði praiz

   

   Bï    tü prödigâl:

   

   Hï    ðat praizeth âl,

   

Kan    praiz trvli nön.

    

 

Tertium genus est trochaicum pentametrum, constans [n. p.] trochaeo, spondaeo, aut iambo; et quatuor deinde trochaeis. Epigrammatibus commodum.

What ðoħ Harri bragz? let him bi nöbl;

 Nöbl Harri hath not hâlf a nöbl.

 

Quartum genus est elegiacum dicolon, ubi primus versus est iambicus mistus pentameter quem ante dedimus: alter constat duobus dimetris, quorum prior recipit in primo loco trochaeum, aut spondaeum; secundo amfimacrum. Secundus dimeter trocaeum solum priori loco admittit; posteriori dactylum, aut amfimacrum, quia ultima cuiusque versus syllaba communis habetur. Elegis aptum est, et epigrammatibus, ut

Konstant tu nön; but ëver fâls tu mï:

  Traitor stil tu luv, thruħ ði faint dezjrz.

Not höp of pitti nou, nor vain redres,

  Turnz mj grïf tu tërz, and renv’d laments, etc.

 

Exemplum epigrammaticum :

A wjz man wäri livz, yit möst sekvr;

  Sorröuz müv not him grëtli, nor deljts:

 Fortvn and dëth hi skorning, onli mäks

 Đ’ërth hiz söber In; but stil hëvn his höm.

 

Quintum genus est anacreontaeum duobus constans pedibus, qui aut trochaei esse possunt, aut spondaei indifferenter, ut

 

        

   Follöu,    follöu

   

   Đoħ    with mischïf

   

   Arm’d;    lik whirlwjnd

   

   Nou    shï fljz ðï.

   

   Til    dëth, faint not

   

   Đen,    but follöu.

   

Küld    J kach ðat

     

   Nimbl    traitor

   

   Skornful    Laura;

   

   Sün    ðen would J

   

   Sïk    avenʒment.

   

   What’s    ð’ avenʒment?

   

   Prosträt    löu, tu

   

Beg    for mersj.

    

 

Quae sequuntur tria genera, canticis sunt aptiora: si [T 3] modo (quod in omnibus melodiis cogitari debet) syllabae longae longioribus notis aptentur, breves brevioribus.

Horum generum primum respondet sapphicis, quorum tres primi versus trochaici sunt antedicti, nisi quod primus pes semper est spondaeus: quartus versus ex tribus est trocaeis, ut

Faiths pvr shïld, ðe Kristian Diana,

 Inglandz glöri, kroun’d with auful onnor;

 Liv long with triumfs, tu bles ði pïpl,

  At ðj sjħt triumfing.

 

Secundum genus est tricolon tetrastrofon, etenim primus quisque versus est dimeter ante dictus, nisi quod primus pes spondaeus tantum est aut trochaeus: duo sequentes sunt trochaici tetrametri, qui primo loco spondaeum admittere possunt, aut trochaeum, tribus trochaeis sequentibus: quartus est trochaicus dimeter, ut

  Röz-chïkt Laura, kum,

 Sing ðou smüðli, with ðj beutiz

 Sjlent muUzik, eiðer oðer

  swïtli gräsing.

 

Tertium genus est tricolon pentastrofon, priori contrarium; primus enim versus est dimeter trochaicus: tres sequentes sunt trochaici tetrametri, quintus dimeter iambicus; constans spondeo, aut trochaeo, et amphimacro, ut

  ʒust bigjler,

 Kjndest luv, yi önli chastest;

 Roiâl in ði smüð denjâlz;

Frouning, or demvrli smjling,

  Stil mj möst deljt.

 

FINIS

 

Ad lectorem Παραίνηδις

 

Ex sacro crucis titolo immutabili, hebraice, graece et latine scripto; sacratae sunt hae linguae ad Iesum Nazarenum Regem iudaeorum pronulgandum. Hoc ut in hebraica lingua factum est per scriptura profetarum, licet nulli genti Pilati temporibus vulgo in usu fuerit: sic etiam in latina lingua fit, indies fiet, donec filii Dei per multas gentes sparsi, linguarum beneficio in unum cogantur. Atque ideo sacro-sanctus ille Christi spiritus, qui doctorum christianorum coetum universum regit, per unam linguam latinam, nulli genti vulgarem, ideoque mutationibus non obnoxiam, tantum hodie linguarum peritiam induxit quanta retroactis seculis nunquam contigit. Et sane huiusce rei causa, tribus his linguis habendus est ille honos, in cuius societatem nulla alia venire possit. At vero postquam ab his discesseris, primas linguae anglicae deferre necesse est. Nam si (quae homini christiano prima cura esse debet) divinorum oraculorum cognitio quaeratur; tanta felicitate, tanta facilitate ex hebraico et graeco contextu in linguam anglicam vertuntur, ut millies melius (Tindalii verba sunt) anglice, quam latine exprimantur, nec ulla opus erit circuitione, ubi verbum verbo eleganter, et plene respondet. Hinc factum est, ut aliquot seculis ante Lutherum (post quem omnis fere Europa sacros codices suo idiomate legeret) sacra scriptura anglice verteretur. Extat adhuc Wiklefi versio Bibliorum circa annum 1370. Extant evangelia cum glossariis Eadfridi episcopi Lindefarnensis circa annum 700. Hac de causa etiam plurimi scriptores Theologi, quamvis linguae latinae scientissimi, anglice tamen scribere maluerunt; quia sic animi sensa optime exprimere, sic rerum ipsarum veritatem proxime attingere se posse iudicabant. Mitto hic reges, principes, populos, linguae anglicae subsidio ad fidem Christi conversos; Sebertum, Edwinum, aliosque saxonum reges ab Ethelberto: Guthurnum ab Aelfrido: Knutum etiam gloriosum illum Daniae regem, et eius exemplo gentem universam: totam bataviam edoctam a Willebrodo: Westfalos a duobus Ewaldis: Hassos, et Thuringos a Wilfrido. Illa potius recordor quae praesens hominum usus, et aetas laudat. Itaque si ab argumentis sacris ad alias artes animum converteris, nihil est in physicis, nihil in mathematicis quod desideres. Historias autem omnium gentium, [n. p.] aut scriptorum, aut metafrastarum industria effecimus nostras .

Quanta autem nox sit apud mediae aetatis scriptores, nemo dubitat: quae tamen linguae anglicae peritia, sit ipsa luce clarior. Quod quidem melius intelliges, quando praelustris viri Henrici Spelmani (qui equestrem dignitatem varia eruditione, et inprimis magna antiquitatis notitia cumulvit) glossarium, quod iam sub praelo est, in lucem prodierit.  Unde non immerito Conradus Gesnerus, linguae anglicae cognitionem, ad veteris saxonicae et germanicae linguae origines explicandas, ad significationes, et orthografiam, plurimum momenti allaturam iudicavit. Atque ut nihil desit in nostra lingua, quod animum discendi cupidum possit allicere; laudatos poetas fere omnes transtulimus: ipsique etiam alia poemata edidimus, quae si ipsi laudatissimi poetae viverent admirarentur. Unum (inquis) occurrit incommodum, asperitas quaedam elationis, seu pronunciandi difficultas. Sed leviculum hoc est impedimentum, et quod ignavos tantum deterreat. Etenim si has quinque voculas, What think ðe chözn ʒuʒez? Quid censent electi iudices? recte protuleris: omnem loquendi difficultatem superasti. Tum demum ea est linguae anglicae facilitas, ut omnem numerorum, casuum, modorum, temporum, personarum differentiam pauculis articulis sive signis adiectis facile explices. Haec erit igitur facillima discendi ratio, ut ex institutione nostra primo legere perfecte discas, collata nostra orthographia cum illa qua auctores adhuc impressi sunt. Post declinationum, et coniugationum formulas disce, ea es duorum dierum opella. Tertio comparationem, et maxime anomalam. Et si te solo duce milites, auxilia habeas lexica, Thomae Thomasii anglico-latinuum, et Iohannis Minshaei etymologicum; aut uno volumine Rideri anglico-latinum et latino anglicum: ita sive nostra transferre velis, sive in nostra, labor erit perexiguus. Fateor lexicographos voces fictitias colligere, aut etiam cudere; vere anglicas negligere, aut etiam ignorare: nostras inter artifices, et rusticos audies; potius quam apud scriptores invenies. Interea vero dum resipuerint, praesentibus utere bonis, et spera meliora. Et si comitem anglice loquentem asciveris, quocum quotidie sermones seras, miraberis tot tibi occurrere vocabula, iam antea ex facie nota in Germania, Gallia, et antiqua Roma. Tu (lector) monitis meis obtempera, et a me salve.

 

FINIS

 1


Editorial notes

 his.

Editorial notes

 own.

Editorial notes

  Sic Fustianice scribit auctor anonimus Detectionis veneficarum, 1618. / Thus bombastically wrote the anonymous author of The Detection of Witches 1618.

Editorial notes

  Vide Fabularum centuriam, fabula 5. / See the collection of tales, tale 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Mancinelus. Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 5.

Editorial notes

Shep. Kal., Ecloga 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 1.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

 Stanihurst, Aeneis,liber 4.

Editorial notes

 Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

 Spenser, The Ruines of Time.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Ibidem.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, praefatio in liber 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 10

Editorial notes

Ibidem.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 1.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

 Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 6.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus 7.

Editorial notes

Desp.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 8.

Editorial notes

 Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 11.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

Shep. Kal., Ecloga 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 8.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 1.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Farnabeius.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 11.

Editorial notes

Ibidem, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 1.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 6.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Epigrammaton, liber 3, 33. CONTROLLARE

Editorial notes

 Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Ibidem, cantus 6.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Ibidem, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 5, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Haringt.

Editorial notes

Haringt, liber 2, epigramma 99.

Editorial notes

Ibidem, epigramma 81.

Editorial notes

 In varias enim sententias abiere docti de libro illo ad Herennium.

Editorial notes

Arcadiae, liber 4, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus l.

Editorial notes

Ibidem.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 6, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

 Liber 2, epigramma 17.

Editorial notes

Desp.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus l0.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 9.

Editorial notes

Ibidem, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

 Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

 Id est.

Editorial notes

 Id est.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 5, cantus 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Spencer, Ecloga 11.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 5, cantus 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Desp.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 12.

Editorial notes

Ibidem.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 8.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus 1.

Editorial notes

 Epigramma 20, linea 3.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 10.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 12.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 1, cantus 12.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 3, cantus 5.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 12.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 2, cantus 4.

Editorial notes

Faerie Queene, liber 4, cantus 2.

Editorial notes

Arcadiae, liber 3, cantus 15.

Editorial notes

Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

 Farnabeius.

Editorial notes

 Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

Mancinellus.

Editorial notes

 Verepaeus.

Editorial notes

Rob. Bellarm. Gram. Heb. part. 4. cap. 5.

Editorial notes

 Campianus.

Editorial notes

Rhythm.

Editorial notes

 Campianus.

Editorial notes

Rhythm.

Editorial notes

 Campianus.

Editorial notes

Rhythm.

Editorial notes

 Campianus.

Editorial notes

 Campianus.

Editorial notes

Praefatio in liberDe obedientiachristianihominis.

Editorial notes

  Praefatio in Dict. Germ. Lat. Pictorii.

Variants

dferfg

ToC